Rosemount RMCT Wireless Pressure Transmitter User Manual 2051 Wireless revAA
Rosemount Inc Wireless Pressure Transmitter 2051 Wireless revAA
User Manual
| Download: |  |
| Mirror Download [FCC.gov] | |
| Document ID | 1808773 |
| Application ID | 2TQTFY0V7SfY+mxAW0o+yQ== |
| Document Description | User Manual |
| Short Term Confidential | No |
| Permanent Confidential | No |
| Supercede | No |
| Document Type | User Manual |
| Display Format | Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf |
| Filesize | 420.06kB (5250783 bits) |
| Date Submitted | 2012-10-05 00:00:00 |
| Date Available | 2012-10-05 00:00:00 |
| Creation Date | 2012-10-02 12:02:44 |
| Producing Software | Acrobat Distiller 10.1.3 (Windows) |
| Document Lastmod | 2012-10-02 12:07:04 |
| Document Title | 2051_Wireless_revAA.book |
| Document Creator | FrameMaker 8.0 |
| Document Author: | ALEXKEN |
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Rosemount 2051 Wireless Series
Pressure, Level, and Flow Solutions with WirelessHART™
Protocol
Title Page
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Rosemount 2051 Wireless Series Scalable Pressure,
Flow, and Level Solutions
Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for
optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents before
installing, using, or maintaining this product.
For technical assistance, contacts are listed below:
Customer Central
Technical support, quoting, and order-related questions.
United States - 1-800-999-9307 (7:00 am to 7:00 pm CST)
Asia Pacific- 65 777 8211
Europe/ Middle East/ Africa - 49 (8153) 9390
North American Response Center
Equipment service needs.
1-800-654-7768 (24 hours—includes Canada)
Outside of these areas, contact your local Rosemount® representative.
The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified
applications. Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require
nuclear-qualified hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings.
For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Rosemount
Sales Representative.
Reference Manual
Title Page
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury:
Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury:
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the
appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review
the approvals section of this manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation.
Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, ensure the
instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field
wiring practices.
Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the
appropriate hazardous locations certifications.
Process leaks could result in death or serious injury.
Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.
Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is in
service.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
The Rosemount 2051 and all other wireless devices should be installed only after the Smart
Wireless Gateway has been installed and is functioning properly. Wireless devices should
also be powered up in order of proximity from the Smart Wireless Gateway, beginning with
the closest. This will result in a simpler and faster network installation.
Shipping considerations for wireless products (Lithium Batteries: Green Power Module,
model number 701PGNKF):
The unit was shipped to you without the Power Module installed. Please remove the
Power Module from the unit prior to shipping.
Primary lithium batteries are regulated in transportation by the U. S. Department of
Transportation, and are also covered by IATA (International Air Transport Association),
ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization), and ARD (European Ground
Transportation of Dangerous Goods). It is the responsibility of the shipper to ensure
compliance with these or any other local requirements. Please consult current
regulations and requirements before shipping.
Using the Rosmeount 3051 Wireless Pressure Transmitter in a manner other than what is
specified by the menufacturer may impair the protection provided by the equipment.
ii
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Contents
1Section 1: Introduction
1.1 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Models Covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Service Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.4 Product Recycling/Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2Section 2: Configuration
2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3 Required Bench Top Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3.1 Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4 Device Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.4.1 Join Device to Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.4.2 Configure Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.4.3 Remove Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.5 Review Configuration Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.5.1 Review Pressure Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.5.2 Review Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.5.3 Review Sensor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2.5.4 Review Radio Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2.6 Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
2.7 Check Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
2.7.1 Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
2.8 Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
2.8.1 Set Process Variable Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
2.8.2 Set Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
2.8.3 Damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2.8.4 Write Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2.9 LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
2.9.1 LCD Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
2.10Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
2.10.1Configure Process Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
2.10.2Sensor Temperature Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
2.11Diagnostics and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
2.11.1Master Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Table of Contents
iii
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
2.11.2Join Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.11.3Number of Available Neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.12Advanced Functions for HART Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.12.1Saving, Recalling, and Cloning Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3Section 3: Installation
3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.2 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.2.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.3 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.3.2 Wireless. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.3.3 Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.3.4 Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.4 Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.4.1 Mount the Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.4.2 Process Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.4.3 Consider Housing Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.4.4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.4.5 Power Module Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.4.6 Installing the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.5 Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.5.1 Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.5.2 Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.5.3 Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . 38
3.5.4 Manifold Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4Section 4: Commissioning
4.1 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.1.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.2 Network Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.3 Verify Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.2 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.2.1 Sensor Trim overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
iv
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
5.2.2 Zero Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
5.2.3 Sensor Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
5.2.4 Recall Factory Trim—Sensor Trim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
5.2.5 Line Pressure Effect (Range 2 and Range 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
5.2.6 Compensating for Line Pressure (Range 4 and Range 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
5.3 LCD Screen Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
5.3.1 Startup Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
5.3.2 Diagnostic button screen sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
5.3.3 Network diagnostic status screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
5.3.4 Device Diagnostic Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
6Section 6: Troubleshooting
6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
6.2 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
6.2.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
6.3 Disassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
6.3.1 Remove from Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
6.3.2 Remove Feature Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
6.4 Reassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
6.4.1 Reassemble the Process Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
AAppendix A: Specifications and
Reference Data
A.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
A.2 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
A.3 Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
A.3.1 Range and Sensor Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
A.4 Physical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
A.5 Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
A.6 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
A.6.1 Options (Include with selected model number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
A.6.2 Options (Include with selected model number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
A.6.3 Options (Include with selected model number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
A.6.4 Options (Include with selected model number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
A.6.5 Options (Include with selected model number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
A.6.6 Options (Include with selected model number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
BAppendix B: Product Certifications
B.1 Wireless Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
June 2012
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
B.1.1 Approved manufacturing locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
B.1.2 European directive information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
B.1.3 Telecommunication compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
B.1.4 FCC and IC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
B.1.5 Ordinary location certification for FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
B.1.6 North American certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
B.1.7 CSA - Canadian Standards Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
B.1.8 European certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
B.1.9 Japanese Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
B.1.10China (NEPSI) Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
vi
Table of Contents
Section 1: Introduction
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Section 1
Introduction
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Models Covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Service Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Product Recycling/Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
1.1
Using This Manual
The sections in this manual provide information on installing, operating, and maintaining the
Rosemount 2051 Wireless pressure transmitter with WirelessHART™ protocol. The sections are
organized as follows:
1.2
Section 2: Configuration provides instruction on commissioning and operating 2051
Wireless transmitters. Information on software functions, configuration parameters,
and online variables is also included.
Section 3: Installation contains mechanical and electrical installation instructions.
Section 4: Commissioning contains techniques for properly commissioning the device.
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance contains operation and maintenance
techniques.
Section 6: Troubleshooting provides troubleshooting techniques for the most common
operating problems.
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data supplies reference and specification
data, as well as ordering information.
Appendix B: Product Certifications contains approval information.
Models Covered
The following Rosemount 2051 Pressure Transmitters are covered by this manual:
Rosemount 2051CD Differential Pressure Transmitter
Measures differential pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar).
Rosemount 2051CG Gage Pressure Transmitter
Measures gage pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar).
Introduction
Reference Manual
Section 1: Introduction
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Rosemount 2051CA Absolute Pressure Transmitter
Measures absolute pressure up to 4000 psia (275,8 bar).
Rosemount 2051T Gage and Absolute Pressure Transmitter
Measures gage pressure up to 10000 psi (689,5 bar).
Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter
Provides precise level and specific gravity measurements up to 300 psi (20,7 bar) for a wide
variety of tank configurations.
1.3
Service Support
To expedite the return process outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson
Process Management representative.
Within the United States, call the Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valves
Response Center using the 1-800-654-RSMT (7768) toll-free number. This center, available 24
hours a day, will assist you with any needed information or materials.
The center will ask for product model and serial numbers, and will provide a Return Material
Authorization (RMA) number. The center will also ask for the process material to which the
product was last exposed.
Individuals who handle products exposed to a hazardous substance can avoid injury if they
are informed of and understand the hazard. If the product being returned was exposed to a
hazardous substance as defined by OSHA, a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) for each hazardous substance identified must be included with the returned goods.
Shipping considerations for wireless products (Lithium Batteries: Green Power Module,
model number 701PGNKF):
The unit was shipped to you without the Power Module installed. Please remove the Power
Module from the unit prior to shipping.
Primary lithium batteries (charged or discharged) are regulated in transportation by the U.
S. Department of Transportation, and are also covered by IATA (International Air Transport
Association), ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization), and ARD (European Ground
Transportation of Dangerous Goods). It is the responsibility of the shipper to ensure
compliance with these or any other local requirements. Please consult current regulations
and requirements before shipping.
Introduction
Reference Manual
Section 1: Introduction
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
The Power Module contains one “D” size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power
Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each Power Module contains approximately 5 grams of
lithium. Under normal conditions, the Power Module materials are self-contained and are not
reactive as long as the batteries and the module integrity are maintained. Care should be taken
to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent
premature discharge. Power Module hazards remain when cells are discharged.
Power Module should be stored in a clean and dry area. For maximum battery life, storage
temperature should not exceed 30° C.
Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valves Response Center representatives will
explain the additional information and procedures necessary to return goods exposed to
hazardous substances.
1.4
Product Recycling/Disposal
Recycling of equipment and packaging should be taken into consideration and disposed of in
accordance with local and national legislation/regulations.
Introduction
Section 1: Introduction
June 2012
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Introduction
Section 2: Configuration
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Section 2
Configuration
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
Required Bench Top Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Device Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
Review Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13
Check Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 18
Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 19
Diagnostics and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 20
Advanced Functions for HART Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 22
2.1
Overview
This section contains information on configuration and verification that should be performed
prior to installation.
Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For
convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled “Fast Keys” for each software
function below the appropriate headings.
Example Software Function
Fast Keys
2.2
1, 2, 3, etc.
Safety Messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing
an operation preceded by this symbol.
Configuration
Section 2: Configuration
2.2.1
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Warnings ( )
Explosions can result in death or serious injury.
Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the
instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or nonincendive field
wiring practices.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
conditions: This device may not cause harmful interference this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 20cm
from all persons.
2.3
Required Bench Top Configuration
Bench top configuration requires a Field Communicator, AMS, or any WirelessHART
Communicator. Connect the Field Communicator leads to the terminals labeled “COMM” on the
terminal block. See Figure 2-1 on page 7.
Bench top configuration consists of testing the transmitter and verifying transmitter
configuration data. 2051 Wireless transmitters must be configured before installation.
Configuring the transmitter on the bench before installation using a Field Communicator, AMS,
or any WirelessHART Communicator ensures that all network settings are working correctly.
When using a Field Communicator, any configuration changes made must be sent to the
transmitter by using the “Send” key (F2). AMS configuration changes are implemented when
the “Apply” button is clicked.
AMS Wireless Configurator
AMS is capable of connecting to devices either directly, using a HART modem, or wirelessly via
the Smart Wireless Gateway. When configuring the device, double click the device icon or right
click and select Configure.
2.3.1
Connection Diagrams
Bench Hook-up
Connect the bench equipment as shown in Figure 2-1, and turn on the Field Communicator by
pressing the ON/OFF key or log into AMS. The Field Communicator or AMS will search for a
HART-compatible device and indicate when the connection is made. If the Field Communicator
or AMS fail to connect, it indicates that no device was found. If this occurs, refer to Section 6:
Troubleshooting.
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Field Hook-up
Figure 2-1 illustrates the wiring for a field hook-up with a Field Communicator or AMS. The Field
Communicator or AMS may be connected at “COMM” on the transmitter terminal block.
Figure 2-1. Field Communicator Connection
For HART communication, a 2051 WirelessHART DD is required.
2.4
Device Network Configuration
2.4.1
Join Device to Network
Fast Keys
2, 1, 1
In order to communicate with the Smart Wireless Gateway, and ultimately the Host System, the
transmitter must be configured to communicate over the wireless network. This step is the
wireless equivalent of connecting wires from a transmitter to the host system.
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 1: Guided Setup.
3.
Select 1: Join Device to Network.
Using a Field Communicator or AMS, enter the Network ID and Join Key so that they match the
Network ID and Join Key of the Smart Wireless Gateway and other devices in the network. If the
Network ID and Join Key are not identical to those set in the Gateway, the transmitter will not
communicate with the network. The Network ID and Join Key may be obtained from the Smart
Wireless Gateway on the Setup>Network>Settings page on the web server.
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
2.4.2
Configure Update Rate
Fast Keys
2, 1, 2
The Update Rate is the frequency at which a new measurement is taken and transmitted over
the wireless network. This by default is 1 minute. This may be changed at commissioning, or at
any time via AMS Wireless Configurator. The Update Rate is user selectable from 8 seconds to 60
minutes.
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 1: Guided Setup.
3.
Select 2: Configure Update Rate.
When device configuration is completed, remove the Power Module and replace the housing
cover. Tighten the cover so that metal contacts metal.
2.4.3
Remove Power Module
After the sensor and network have been configured, remove the Power Module and replace the
housing cover. The Power Module should be inserted only when the device is ready to be
commissioned.
Use caution when handling the Power Module. The Power Module may be damaged if dropped
from heights in excess of 20 ft.
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
2.5
June 2012
Review Configuration Data
The following is a list of factory default configurations that can be viewed by using the Field
Communicator or AMS. Follow the steps below to review the transmitter configuration
information.
Note
Information and procedures in this section that make use of Field Communicator fast key
sequences and AMS assume that the transmitter and communication equipment are
connected, powered, and operating correctly.
2.5.1
Review Pressure Information
Fast Keys
2, 2, 2
To view pressure information:
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 2: Pressure.
4.
Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
2.5.2
Unit
Transfer Function
Damping
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value
Maximum
Minimum
Minimum Span
Review Device Information
Fast Keys
2, 2, 4, 3
To view device information:
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 4: Device Information.
4.
Select 3: Device.
5.
Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
Configuration
Manufacturer
Model
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
Final Assembly Number
Universal
Field Device
Software
Hardware
Descriptor
Message
Date
Model Number I
Model Number II
Model Number III
SI Unit Restriction
Country
Device ID
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
2.5.3
June 2012
Review Sensor Information
Fast Keys
2, 2, 4, 4
To view sensor information:
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 4: Device Information.
4.
Select 4: Sensor.
5.
Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
Measurement Type
Module Type
Module Serial Number
Sensor Materials
• Isolator Material
• Fill Fluid
Process Connector
• Connector Type
• Connector Material
• O Ring Material
• Drain Vent Material
Remote Seal
• Number of Seals
• Seal Type
• Diaphragm Material
• Seal Fill Fluid
2.5.4
Review Radio Information
Fast Keys
2, 2, 4, 5
To view radio information:
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 4: Device Information.
4.
Select 5: Radio.
5.
Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
Configuration
Manufacturer
11
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
12
Device Type
Device Revision
Software Revision
Hardware Revision
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
2.6
1. Overview
2. Configure
3. Service Tools
June 2012
Field Communicator
1. Active Alerts
2. Communication Status
3. Pressure
4. Pressure Status
5. Last Update Time
1. Join Device to Network
2. Configure Update Rate
3. Zero Trim
4. Configure Device Display
5. Configure Process Alarms
6. Basic Setup
1. Guided Setup
2. Manual Setup
3. Alert Setup
1. Wireless
2. Pressure
3. Device Temperatures
4. Device Information
5. Device Display
6. Other
1. HI-HI Alarm
2. HI Alarm
3. LO Alarm
4. LO-LO Alarm
1. Sensor Temperature
2. Electronics Temperature
1. Unit
2. Maximum
3. Minimum
1. Configure LO-LO Alarm
2. Mode
3. Variable
4. Alarm Direction
5. Alarm Limit
6. Dead Band
1. Configure HI-HI Alarm
2. Mode
3. Variable
4. Alarm Direction
5. Alarm Limit
6. Dead Band
1. Tag
2. Long Tag
3. Device
4. Sensor
5. Radio
6. Write Protect
1. Configure LO Alarm
2. Mode
3. Variable
4. Alarm Direction
5. Alarm Limit
6. Dead Band
1. Configure HI Alarm
2. Mode
3. Variable
4. Alarm Direction
5. Alarm Limit
6. Dead Band
1. Mode
2. Display Options
2. Variables
3. Communications
4. Routine Maintenance
5. Simulate
1. Measurement and
Status Log
1. Active Alerts
2. History
1. Alerts
1. Join Status
2. Communication Status
3. Join Mode
4. Number of Available
Neighbors
5. Number of Advertisements
Heard
6. Number of Join Attempts
1. Sensor Calibration
2. Other
1. Pressure
2. Sensor Temperature
3. Electronics Temperature
4. Supply Voltage
Configuration
1. Network ID
2. Join Device to Network
3. Broadcast Rates
4. Configure Broadcast Power Level
5. Power Mode
6. Power Source
1. Percent of Range
2. Pressure
3. Pressure Status
4. Sensor Temperature
5. Sensor Temperature Status
6. Electronics Temperature
7. Electronics Temp Status
8. Supply Voltage
9. Supply Voltage Status
10. Last Update Time
1. Current Lower Trim
2. Current Upper Trim
3. Zero Sensor Trim
4. Lower Sensor Trim
5. Upper Sensor Trim
6. Recall Factory Trim
1. Master Reset
2. Measurement History
3. Advertise to New Devices
1. Configure Update Rate
2. Message 1
3. Message 2
1. Unit
2. Transfer Function
3. Damping
4. Upper Range Value
5. Lower Range Value
6. Maximum
7. Minimum
8. Minimum Span
9. Range Using Applied Value
1. Manufacturer
2. Model
3. Final Assembly Number
4. Universal
5. Field Device
6. Software
7. Hardware
8. Descriptor
9. Message
10. Date
11. Model Number I
12. Model Number II
13. Model Number III
14. SI Unit Restriction
15. Country
16. Device ID
1. Measurement Type
2. Module Type
3. Module Serial Number
4. Sensor Materials
5. Process Connector
6. Remote Seal
1. Number of Seals
2. Seal Type
3. Diaphragm Material
4. Seal Fill Fluid
1. Connector Type
2. Connector Material
3. O Ring Material
4. Drain Vent Material
1. Isolator Fluid
2. Fill Fluid
1. Manufacturer
2. Device Type
3. Device Revision
4. Software Revision
5. Hardware Revision
13
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
2.7
Check Output
Before performing other transmitter operations, ensure that the transmitter is operating
properly by checking the operating parameters.
2.7.1
Operating Parameters
Fast Keys
3, 2
The pressure output value in both engineering units and percent of range will reflect the applied
pressure even when the applied pressure is outside of the configured range as long as the
applied pressure is between the upper and lower range limit of the transmitter. For example, if a
Range 2 2051T (LRL = 0 psi, URL = 150 psi) is ranged from 0 to 100 psi, an applied pressure of
150 psi will return a % of range output of 150% and an engineering output of 150 psi.
To view the Operating Parameters menu:
1.
From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.
2.
Select 2: Variables.
The Operating Parameters menu displays the following information pertaining to the device:
Percent of Range
Pressure
Pressure Status
Sensor Temperature
Sensor Temperature Status
Electronics Temperature
Electronics Temperature Status
Supply Voltage
Supply Voltage Status
Last Update Time
2.8
Basic Setup
2.8.1
Set Process Variable Unit
Fast Keys
2, 2, 2, 1
The PV Unit command sets the process variable units to allow you to monitor your process using
the appropriate units of measure.
To select a unit of measure for the PV:
14
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 2: Pressure.
4.
Select 1: Unit to select from the following engineering units:
Configuration
June 2012
inH2O
inHg
ftH2O
mmH2O
mmHg
psi
bar
mbar
g/cm2
kg/cm2
Pa
kPa
torr
atm
MPa
inH2O at 4 °C
mmH2O at 4 °C
15
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
2.8.2
Set Transfer Function
Fast Keys
2, 2, 2, 2
The 2051 Wireless has two output settings: Linear and Square Root. Activate the square root
output option to make output proportional to flow. As input approaches zero, the 2051
Wireless automatically switches to linear output in order to ensure a more smooth, stable
output near zero (see Figure 2-2).
From 0 to 0.6 percent of the ranged pressure input, the slope of the curve is unity (y = x). This
allows accurate calibration near zero. Greater slopes would cause large changes in output (for
small changes at input). From 0.6 percent to 0.8 percent, curve slope equals 42 (y = 42x) to
achieve continuous transition from linear to square root at the transition point.
To select the output transfer function:
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 2: Pressure.
4.
Select 2: Transfer Function and choose either Linear or Square Root.
Figure 2-2. Square Root Output Transition Point
Full Scale
Flow (%)
Sq. Root
Curve
Sq. Root Curve
Transition Point
Transition Point
Linear Section
Slope=42
Slope=1
16
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
2.8.3
June 2012
Damping
Fast Keys
2, 2, 2, 3
The Damping command introduces a delay in processing which increases the response time of
the transmitter; smoothing variations in output readings caused by rapid input changes. In the
2051 Wireless pressure transmitter, damping only takes effect when the device is placed in high
power refresh mode and during calibration. In normal power mode, the effective damping is 0.
Note that when the device is in high power refresh mode, battery power will be depleted rapidly.
Determine the appropriate damp setting based on the necessary response time, signal stability,
and other requirements of the loop dynamics of your system. The damping value of your device
is user selectable from 0 to 25.6 seconds.
To determine the current damping value:
2.8.4
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 2: Pressure.
4.
Select 3: Damping.
Write Protect
Fast Keys
2, 2, 4, 6
The 2051 Wireless has a software write protect security feature.
The view write protect security settings:
Configuration
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 4: Device Information.
4.
Select 6: Write Protect.
17
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
2.9
LCD Display
2.9.1
LCD Display Configuration
Fast Keys
2, 1, 4
The LCD display indicates output and abbreviated diagnostic messages.
Note
Use Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002.
The LCD display features a four-line display and a bar graph. The first line of five characters
displays the output description, the second line of seven digits displays the actual value, the
third line of six characters displays engineering units and the fourth line displays “Error” when
the transmitter is in alarm. The LCD display can also display diagnostic messages. The bar graph
represents the network connectivity status.
See “LCD Screen Messages” on page 53 for more information on LCD messages.
To configure LCD display options:
18
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 1: Guided Setup.
3.
Select 4: Configure Device Display.
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
2.10
Detailed Setup
2.10.1
Configure Process Alarms
Fast Keys
2, 1, 5
Alerts allow the user to configure the transmitter to output a HART message when the
configured data point is exceeded. A process alert will be transmitted continuously if the set
points are exceeded and the alert mode is ON. An alert will be displayed on a Field
Communicator, AMS status screen or in the error section of the LCD display. The alert will reset
once the value returns within range.
Note
HI alert value must be higher than the LO alert value. Both alert values must be within the
pressure or temperature sensor limits.
Units of Measurement
Example 1: Rising Alert
Alert “OFF”
Alert “ON”
Alert “OFF”
Alert Set Point
Deadband
Assigned Value
Time
Units of Measurement
Example 2: Falling Alert
Alert “OFF”
Alert “ON”
Alert “OFF”
Assigned Value
Alert Set Point
Deadband
Time
To configure the process alerts, perform the following procedure:
Configuration
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 1: Guided Setup.
3.
Select 5: Configure Process Alarms and follow the on-screen instructions to complete
configure of process alarms.
19
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
2.10.2
Sensor Temperature Unit
Fast Keys
2, 2, 3, 1, 1
The Sensor Temperature Unit command selects between Celsius and Fahrenheit units for the
sensor temperature. The sensor temperature output is accessible via HART only.
To select the sensor temperature unit:
2.11
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 3: Device Temperatures.
4.
Select 1: Sensor Temperature.
5.
Select 1: Unit to select from Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Diagnostics and Service
Diagnostics and service functions listed below are primarily for use after field installation. The
Transmitter Test feature is designed to verify that the transmitter is operating properly, and can
be performed either on the bench or in the field.
2.11.1
Master Reset
Fast Keys
3, 4, 2, 1
The master reset function will reset the device electronics. To perform a master reset:
2.11.2
1.
From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.
2.
Select 4: Routine Maintenance.
3.
Select 2: Other.
4.
Select 1: Master Reset.
Join Status
Fast Keys
3, 3, 1
To view the join status of the device, perform the following procedure:
20
1.
From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.
2.
Select 3: Communications.
3.
Select 1: Join Status.
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Wireless devices join the secure network through a four step process:
2.11.3
Step 1. Network Found
Step 2. Network Security Clearance Granted
Step 3. Network Bandwidth Allocated
Step 4. Network Join Complete
Number of Available Neighbors
Fast Keys
3, 3, 4
In a self-organizing network, the more neighbors a device has, the more robust the network will
be. To view the number of available neighbors for the wireless device, perform the following
procedure:
Configuration
1.
From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.
2.
Select 3: Routine Maintenance.
3.
Select 4: Number of Available Neighbors.
21
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
2.12
Advanced Functions for HART Protocol
2.12.1
Saving, Recalling, and Cloning Configuration Data
Fast Keys
left arrow, 1, 2
Use the cloning feature of the Field Communicator or the AMS “User Configuration” feature to
configure several 2051 Wireless transmitters similarly. Cloning involves configuring a
transmitter, saving the configuration data, then sending a copy of the data to a separate
transmitter. Several possible procedures exist when saving, recalling, and cloning configuration
data. For complete instructions refer to the Field Communicator manual (publication no.
00809-0100-4276) or AMS Books Online. One common method is as follows:
Field Communicator
1.
Completely configure the first transmitter.
2.
Save the configuration data:
a.
Select F2 SAVE from the Field Communicator HOME/ONLINE screen.
b. Ensure that the location to which the data will be saved is set to MODULE. If it is not,
select 1: Location to set the save location to MODULE.
c.
Select 2: Name, to name the configuration data. The default is the transmitter tag
number.
d. Ensure that the data type is set to STANDARD. If the data type is NOT STANDARD,
select 3: Data Type to set the data type to STANDARD.
e.
22
Select F2 SAVE.
3.
Connect and power the receiving transmitter and Field Communicator.
4.
Select the back arrow from the HOME/ONLINE screen. The Field Communicator menu
appears.
5.
Select 1: Offline, 2: Saved Configuration, 1: Module Contents to reach the MODULE
CONTENTS menu.
6.
Use the DOWN ARROW to scroll through the list of configurations in the memory
module, and use the RIGHT ARROW to select and retrieve the required configuration.
7.
Select 1: Edit.
8.
Select 1: Mark All.
9.
Select F2 SAVE.
10.
Use the DOWN ARROW to scroll through the list of configurations in the memory
module, and use the RIGHT ARROW to select the configuration again.
11.
Select 3: Send to download the configuration to the transmitter.
12.
Select OK after the control loop is set to manual.
13.
After the configuration has been sent, select OK.
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
When finished, the Field Communicator informs you of the status. Repeat Steps 3 through 13 to
configure another transmitter.
Note
The transmitter receiving cloned data must have the same software version (or later) as the
original transmitter.
AMS creating a Reusable Copy
To create a reusable copy of a configuration perform the following procedure:
1.
Completely configure the first transmitter.
2.
Select View then User Configuration View from the menu bar (or click the toolbar
button).
3.
In the User Configuration window, right click and select New from the context menu.
4.
In the New window, select a device from the list of templates shown, and click OK.
5.
The template is copied into the User Configurations window, with the tag name
highlighted; rename it as appropriate and press Enter.
Note
A device icon can also be copied by dragging and dropping a device template or any other
device icon from AMS Explorer or Device Connection View into the User Configurations window.
The “Compare Configurations” window appears, showing the Current values of the copied
device on one side and mostly blank fields on the other (User Configuration) side.
6.
Transfer values from the current configuration to the user configuration as appropriate
or enter values by typing them into the available fields.
7.
Click Apply to apply the values, or click OK to apply the values and close the window.
AMS Applying a User Configuration
Any amount of user configurations can be created for the application. They can also be saved,
and applied to connected devices or to devices in the Device List or Plant Database.
To apply a user configuration perform the following procedure:
Configuration
1.
Select the desired user configuration in the User Configurations window.
2.
Drag the icon onto a like device in AMS Explorer or Device Connection View. The
Compare Configurations window opens, showing the parameters of the target device
on one side and the parameters of the user configuration on the other.
3.
Transfer parameters from the user configuration to the target device as desired, Click
OK to apply the configuration and close the window.
23
Section 2: Configuration
June 2012
24
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Configuration
Section 3: Installation
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Section 3
Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 25
Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 25
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 27
Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 29
Installing the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 35
Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 36
3.1
Overview
The information in this section covers installation considerations. A Quick Installation Guide
(document number 00825-0100-4100) is shipped with every transmitter to describe basic
installation and startup procedures. Dimensional drawings for each Rosemount 2051 Wireless
variation and mounting configuration are included in Appendix A: Specifications and Reference
Data.
Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For
convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled “Fast Keys” for each software
function below the appropriate headings.
3.2
Safety Messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operation. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated with a warning symbol (
). Refer to the following safety messages before
performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
Installation
25
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
3.2.1
Warnings ( )
Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury.
Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.
Explosions can result in death or serious injury.
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the
appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review
the approvals section of the 2051 Wireless reference manual for any restrictions associated
with a safe installation.
Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the
instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field
wiring practices.
Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the
appropriate hazardous locations certifications.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage may be present on leads can
cause electrical shock.
Process leaks could result in death or serious injury.
Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.
Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is
in service.
Replacement equipment or spare parts not approved by Rosemount Inc. for use as spare
parts could reduce the pressure retaining capabilities of the transmitter and may render the
instrument dangerous.
Use only bolts supplied or sold by Rosemount Inc. as spare parts.
Improper assembly of manifolds to traditional flange can damage SuperModule™.
For safe assembly of manifold to traditional flange, bolts must break back plane of
flange web (i.e., bolt hold) but must not contact module housing.
The Power Module with the wireless unit contains one “D” size primary lithium/thionyl
chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each Power Module
contains approximately 5 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the Power Module
materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the batteries and the pack
integrity are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical
damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge.
26
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
3.3
Considerations
3.3.1
General
Section 3: Installation
June 2012
Measurement performance depends upon proper installation of the transmitter and impulse
piping. Mount the transmitter close to the process and use a minimum of piping to achieve best
performance. Also, consider the need for easy access, personnel safety, practical field
calibration, and a suitable transmitter environment. Install the transmitter to minimize
vibration, shock, and temperature fluctuation.
3.3.2
Wireless
Power Up Sequence
The Power Module should not be installed on any wireless device until the Smart Wireless
Gateway is installed and functioning properly. Wireless devices should also be powered up in
order of proximity from the Smart Wireless Gateway beginning with the closest. This will result
in a simpler and faster network installation. Enable High Speed Operation on the Gateway to
ensure that new devices join the network faster. For more information see the Smart Wireless
Gateway Manual (Doc. No. 00809-0200-4420).
Field Communicator Connections
In order for the Field Communicator to interface with the 2051, the Power Module must be
connected.
Figure 3-1. Field Communicator Connections
3.3.3
Mechanical
Note
For steam service or for applications with process temperatures greater than the limits of the
transmitter, do not blow down impulse piping through the transmitter. Flush lines with the
blocking valves closed and refill lines with water before resuming measurement.
Note
When the transmitter is mounted on its side, position the Coplanar flange to ensure proper
venting or draining. Mount the flange as shown in Figure 3.4.2 on page 32, keeping drain/vent
connections on the bottom for gas service and on the top for liquid service.
Installation
27
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
3.3.4
Environmental
Access requirements and cover installation on page 29 can help optimize transmitter
performance. Mount the transmitter to minimize ambient temperature changes, vibration,
mechanical shock, and to avoid external contact with corrosive materials. Appendix A:
Specifications and Reference Data lists temperature operating limits.
Figure 3-2. Installation Flowchart
START HERE
Bench
Calibration?
No
Field Install
Yes
Configure
(Section 2)
Set Units
Check Switches
(page 34)
Verify
Mount
Transmitter
(page 29)
Review
Transmitter
Configuration
(page 7)
Install Power
Module
(pages 35–34)
Check Process
Connection
(page 32)
Set Range
Points
Apply Pressure
Confirm
Transmitter
Configuration
(page 7)
Set Network
Parameters
Within
Specifications?
No
Refer to
Section 4
Operation and
Maintenance
28
Yes
Trim Transmitter
for Mounting
Effects
(page 48)
Done
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
3.4
June 2012
Installation Procedures
For dimensional drawing information refer to “Dimensional Drawings” on page 83.
Process Flange Orientation
Mount the process flanges with sufficient clearance for process connections. For safety reasons,
place the drain/vent valves so the process fluid is directed away from possible human contact
when the vents are used. In addition, consider the need for a testing or calibration input.
Housing Rotation
See “Consider Housing Rotation” on page 34.
Power Module Side of Electronics Housing
Mount the transmitter so the Power Module side is accessible. Clearance of 2.75-in. (70 mm) is
required for cover removal.
Circuit Side of Electronics Housing
Provide 0.75 in. (19 mm) of clearance for units with out an LCD display. Three inches of
clearance is required for cover removal if a meter is installed.
Cover Installation
Always ensure a proper seal by installing the electronics housing cover(s) so that polymer
contacts polymer. Use Rosemount O-rings.
3.4.1
Mount the Transmitter
Mounting Brackets
Facilitate mounting transmitter to a 2-in. pipe, or to a panel. The B4 Bracket (SST) option is
standard for use with the Coplanar and In-Line flanges. “Coplanar Flange Mounting Configurations” on page 83 shows bracket dimensions and mounting configurations for the B4 option.
Options B1–B3 and B7–B9 are sturdy, epoxy/polyester-painted brackets designed for use with
the traditional flange. The B1–B3 brackets have carbon steel bolts, while the B7–B9 brackets
have stainless steel bolts. The BA and BC brackets and bolts are stainless steel. The B1/B7/BA
and B3/B9/BC style brackets support 2-inch pipe-mount installations, and the B2/B8 style
brackets support panel mounting.
Note
Most transmitters are calibrated in the horizontal position. Mounting the transmitter in any
other position will shift the zero point to the equivalent amount of liquid head caused by the
varied mounting position. To reset zero point, refer to “Sensor Trim” on page 49.
Position the antenna such that it is vertical, typically straight up (antenna may be pointed down
as well.)
Installation
29
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Flange Bolts
The 2051 can be shipped with a Coplanar flange or a Traditional flange installed with four
1.75-inch flange bolts. Mounting bolts and bolting configurations for the Coplanar and
Traditional flanges can be found on page 2-6, 7. Stainless steel bolts supplied by Emerson
Process Management are coated with a lubricant to ease installation. Carbon steel bolts do not
require lubrication. No additional lubricant should be applied when installing either type of bolt.
Bolts supplied by Emerson Process Management are identified by their head markings:
B7M
Carbon Steel (CS) Head Markings
Stainless Steel (SST) Head Markings
660
CL A
316
B8M
KM
Alloy K-500 Head Marking
F593_
* The last digit in the F593_ head marking may
be any letter between A and M.
Bolt Installation
Only use bolts supplied with the Rosemount 2051 or sold by Emerson Process Management as
spare parts. When installing the transmitter to one of the optional mounting brackets, torque
the bolts to 125 in-lb. (0,9 N-m). Use the following bolt installation procedure:
1.
Finger-tighten the bolts.
2.
Torque the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossing pattern.
3.
Torque the bolts to the final torque value using the same crossing pattern.
Torque values for the flange and manifold adapter bolts are as follows:
Table 3-1. Bolt Installation
Torque Values
30
Bolt Material
Initial Torque Value
Final Torque Value
CS-ASTM-A445 Standard
316 SST—Option L4
ASTM-A-193-B7M—Option L5
Alloy K-500—Option L6
ASTM-A-453-660—Option L7
ASTM-A-193-B8M—Option L8
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
150 in.-lb (17 N-m)
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
150 in.-lb (17 N-m)
150 in.-lb (17 N-m)
650 in.-lb (73 N-m)
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
650 in.-lb (73 N-m)
650 in.-lb (73 N-m)
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Impulse Piping
The piping between the process and the transmitter must accurately transfer the pressure to
obtain accurate measurements. There are five possible sources of error: leaks, friction loss
(particularly if purging is used), trapped gas in a liquid line, liquid in a gas line, and density
variations between the legs.
The best location for the transmitter in relation to the process pipe depends on the process
itself. Use the following guidelines to determine transmitter location and placement of impulse
piping:
Installation
Keep impulse piping as short as possible.
For liquid service, slope the impulse piping at least 1 inch per foot (8 cm per m) upward
from the transmitter toward the process connection.
For gas service, slope the impulse piping at least 1 inch per foot (8 cm per m) downward
from the transmitter toward the process connection.
Avoid high points in liquid lines and low points in gas lines.
Make sure both impulse legs are the same temperature.
Use impulse piping large enough to avoid friction effects and blockage.
Vent all gas from liquid piping legs.
When using a sealing fluid, fill both piping legs to the same level.
When purging, make the purge connection close to the process taps and purge
through equal lengths of the same size pipe. Avoid purging through the transmitter.
Keep corrosive or hot (above 250 °F [121 °C]) process material out of direct contact
with the SuperModule and flanges.
Prevent sediment deposits in the impulse piping.
Keep the liquid head balanced on both legs of the impulse piping.
Avoid conditions that might allow process fluid to freeze within the process flange.
31
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
5.3
LCD Screen Messages
5.3.1
Startup Screen Sequence
The following screens will display when the Power Module is first connected to the Rosemount
2051 Wireless.
XXXXX
XXXXxxx
xxxxxx
3051
All Segments On: used to visually
determine if there are any bad
segments on the LCD
Device Identification: used to
determine Device Type.
WIrels
Abcde
fgh
PRESS
5 8. 0
Device Information - Tag: user
entered tag which is eight
characters long - will not display if
all characters are blank
PV Screen - process pressure
PSI
Operation and Maintenance
53
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
SNSR
2 5. 0 0
SV Screen - sensor temperature
value
deg c
DEV
2 5. 2 5
TV Screen - device temperature
value
deg c
Suply
7. 2 1
QV Screen - voltage reading at the
power supply terminals
volts
PRCNT
7. 2 1
Percent Range Screen - percent
range reading
RANGE
alert
presnt
54
Alert Screen - at least one alert is
present - this screen will not
display if no alerts are present
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
5.3.2
June 2012
Diagnostic button screen sequence
The following five screens will display when the device is operating properly and the Diagnostic
Button has been pressed.
Abcde
fgh
id - 12
Device Information - Tag: user
entered tag which is eight
characters long - will not display if
all characters are blank
Device Identification: used to
determine Device ID
345678
netwk
13 0 5
ID
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 3:
assuming the device has the
correct join key, this ID tells the
user what network the device can
connect with
Diagnostic Button Screen 4: the device has joined a
network and has been fully configured and has
multiple parents
OK
Operation and Maintenance
55
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Suply
7. 2 1
Diagnostic Button Screen 5:
voltage reading at the power
supply terminals
volts
5.3.3
Network diagnostic status screens
These screens display the network status of the device. Only one will be shown during the
startup sequence or diagnostic sequence.
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.1: the device is
attempting to start the radio
unknwn
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.2: the device has just
restarted
INIT
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.3: the device is starting
to join the process
idle
56
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.4: the device is in a
disconnected state and requires a “Force Join”
command to join the network
DISCNT
NETwK
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.5: the device is
searching for the Network
SRCHNG
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.6: the device is
attempting to join a network
NEGOT
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.7: the device is
connected to the Network, but is in a
“Quarantined” state
conect
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.8: the device is joined
and operational, but is running with limited
bandwidth for sending periodic data
LIM-OP
Operation and Maintenance
57
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.9: the device has joined
a network and has been fully configured and has
multiple parents
OK
58
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
5.3.4
June 2012
Device Diagnostic Screens
The following screens will show the device diagnostics depending on the state of the device.
DEV
fAilur
PRESS
5 8. 0
Device Information - Status: there
is a critical error which may
prevent the device from
operating correctly. Check
additional status screens for more
information.
PV Screen - process pressure
value
PSI
SNSR
2 5. 0 0
SV Screen - sensor temperature
value
deg c
DEV
2 5. 2 5
TV Screen - device temperature
value
deg c
Operation and Maintenance
59
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Suply
7. 2 1
QV Screen - voltage reading at the
power supply terminals
volts
PRCNT
7. 2 1
Percent Range Screen - percent
range reading
RANGE
alert
presnt
Abcde
fgh
id - 12
345678
60
Alert Screen - at least one alert is
present - this screen will not
display if no alerts are present
Diagnostic Button Screen 1 - Tag:
user entered tag which is eight
characters long - will not display if
all characters are blank
Diagnostic Button Screen 2: the
device’s identifier that is used to
make up the HART long address the Smart Wireless Gateway may
use this to help identify devices if
no unique user tag is available
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
suply
failur
suply
low
radio
failur
confg
failur
Operation and Maintenance
Diagnostic Button Screen 7.1: the
terminal voltage has dropped
below level of operating limit.
Replace the Power Module
(Part Number: 701PGNKF)
Diagnostic Button Screen 7.2: the
terminal voltage is below the
recommended operating range if this is a battery operated device,
the Power Module should be
replaced - for line powered
devices, the supply voltage
should be increased
Diagnostic Button Screen 8: the
device may not be able to
communicate with the radio or
the radio has an internal error. In
this state the device may still be
operational and publishing HART
data
Diagnostic Button Screen 9.1:
configuration of the transmitter is
invalid such that critical operation
of the device may be affected check the extended configuration
status to identify which
configuration item(s) need to be
corrected
61
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
confg
warn
snsr
failur
snsr
warn
Diagnostic Button Screen 9.2:
configuration of the transmitter is
invalid such that non-critical
operation of the device may be
affected - check the extended
configuration status to identify
which configuration item(s) need
to be corrected
Diagnostic Button Screen 10.1: a
sensor attached to the
transmitter has failed, and valid
readings from that sensor are no
longer possible - check the sensor
and sensor wiring connections check additional status for more
detailed information of the failure
source
Diagnostic Button Screen 10.2: a
sensor attached to the
transmitter is degraded, readings
from that sensor may not be
within accuracy specifications check the process, and sensor
wiring connections - check
additional status for more
detailed information of the
warning source
Note
Use the Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002.
62
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Section 6
Troubleshooting
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 63
Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 63
Disassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 67
Reassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 69
6.1
Overview
Table 6-2 provides summarized maintenance and troubleshooting suggestions for the most
common operating problems.
If you suspect malfunction despite the absence of any diagnostic messages on the Field
Communicator display, follow the procedures described here to verify that transmitter
hardware and process connections are in good working order. Always deal with the most likely
checkpoints first.
6.2
Safety Messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing
an operation preceded by this symbol.
6.2.1
Warnings ( )
Explosions can result in death or serious injury.
Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure that
the instruments are installed according to intrinsically safe or nonincendive field
wiring practices.
Static electricity can damage sensitive components.
Observe safe handling precautions for static-sensitive components.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
Process leaks could result in death or serious injury.
Troubleshooting
Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.
Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is in
service.
63
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 6-1. Rosemount 2051 Wireless Device Status Information
Device Status
Description
Electronics Failure
An electronics error that could
impact the device measement
reading has occurred.
Radio Failure
The wireless radio has detected a
failure or stopped communicating.
Recommended Action
1.
Reset the device
2.
Reconfirm all configuration items in the device
3.
If the condition persists, replace the electronics
1.
Reset the device
2.
If the condition persists, replace the electronics
Supply Voltage
Failure
The supply voltage is too low for
the device to function properly.
1.
Replace the Power Module
Electronics Warning
The device has detected an
electronics error that does not
currently impact the device
measurement reading.
1.
Reset the device
2.
Reconfirm all configuration items in the device
3.
If the condition persists, replace the electronics
1.
Check process for possible saturation condition
2.
Verify that the appropriate sensor was chosen for the
application
3.
Reconfirm sensor configuration
4.
Reset the device
5.
Replace the sensor
1.
Verify environmental temperature is within the
transmitter’s range
2.
Remote mount the transmitter away from process
and environmental conditions
3.
Reset the device
4.
If the condition persists, replace the electronics
Pressure has
Exceeded Limits
Electronics
Temperature has
Exceeded Limits
The sensor has exceeded the
maximum measurement range.
The electronics temperature has
exceeded the transmitter's
maximum range.
Supply Voltage Low
The supply voltage is low and may
soon affect broadcast updates.
1.
Replace the Power Module
Database Memory
Warning
The device has failed to write to
the database memory. Any data
written during this time may have
been lost.
1.
Reset the device
2.
Reconfirm all configuration items in the device
3.
If logging dynamic data not needed, this advisory
can be safely ignored
4.
If the condition persists, replace the electronics
64
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Device Status
Description
Configuration Error
The device has detected a
configuration error based on a
change to the device.
HI HI Alarm
HI Alarm
LO Alarm
LO LO Alarm
Button Stuck
Simulation Active
Troubleshooting
The primary variable has surpassed
the user defined limit.
The primary variable has surpassed
the user defined limit.
The primary variable has surpassed
the user defined limit.
The primary variable has surpassed
the user defined limit.
A buttons on the Electronics Board
is detected as stuck in the active
position.
The device is in simulation mode
and may not be reporting actual
information.
Recommended Action
1.
Click on details for more information
2.
Correct the parameter that has a configuration error
3.
Reset the device
4.
If the condition persists, replace the electronics
1.
Verify that the process variable is within user
specified limits
2.
Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit
3.
If not needed, disable this alert
1.
Verify that the process variable is within user
specified limits
2.
Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit
3.
If not needed, disable this alert
1.
Verify that the process variable is within user
specified limits
2.
Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit
3.
If not needed, disable this alert
1.
Verify that the process variable is within user
specified limits
2.
Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit
3.
If not needed, disable this alert
1.
Check the buttons for obstructions
2.
Reset the device
3.
If the condition persists, replace the electronics
1.
Verify that simulation is no longer required
2.
Disable Simulation mode in Service Tools
3.
Reset the device
65
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 6-2. Rosemount 2051 Wireless Troubleshooting
Symptom
Recommended Actions
Transmitter will not respond to changes in
applied pressure
Check test equipment
Check impulse piping or manifold for blockage
Verify applied pressure is within sensor limits
Digital Pressure Variable reading is low or
high
Check test equipment (verify accuracy)
Check impulse piping for blockage or low fill in wet leg
Verify transmitter is calibrated properly
Verify pressure calculations for application
Digital Pressure Variable reading is erratic
Check application for faulty equipment in pressure line
Verify transmitter is not reacting directly to equipment turning on/off
LCD display is not functioning
Reseat the LCD according to “Installing the LCD Display” on page 35
Verify that the LCD display is a wireless LCD Meter. An LCD from a wired device will
not function in a wireless device. Rosemount part number: 00753-9004-0002
Verify that the LCD display mode is not disabled.
Table 6-3. Wireless Network Troubleshooting
Symptom
Recommended Actions
Device not joining the network
Verify network ID and join key
Wait longer (30 min.)
Enable High Speed Operation on Smart Wireless Gateway
Check Power Module
Verify device is within range of at least one other device
Verify network is in active network advertise
Power Cycle device to try again
Verify device is configured to join. Send the “Force Join” command to the device
See troubleshooting section of Smart Wireless Gateway for more information
Short battery life
Check that “Power Always On” mode is off
Verify device is not installed in extreme temperatures
Verfiy that device is not a network pinch point
Check for excessive network rejoins due to poor connectivity
Limited Bandwidth Error
Reduce the Update Rate on transmitter
Increase communication paths by adding more wireless points
Check that device has been online for at least an hour
Check that device is not routing through a “limited” routing node
Create a new network with an additional Smart Wireless Gateway
66
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
6.3
Disassembly Procedures
6.3.1
Remove from Service
Be aware of the following:
Follow all plant safety rules and procedures.
Isolate and vent the process from the transmitter before removing the transmitter from
service.
Detach the process flange by removing the four flange bolts and two alignment screws
that secure it.
Do not scratch, puncture, or depress the isolating diaphragms.
Clean isolating diaphragms with a soft rag and a mild cleaning solution, and rinse with
clear water.
Whenever you remove the process flange or flange adapters, visually inspect the Teflon
o-rings. Replace the o-rings if they show any signs of damage, such as nicks or cuts. If
they are not damaged, reuse them.
The 2051 Wireless transmitter is attached to the process connection by four bolts and two cap
screws. Remove the bolts and separate the transmitter from the process connection. Leave the
process connection in place and ready for re-installation.
The 2051 Wireless In-line transmitter is attached to the process by a single hex nut process
connection. Loosen the hex nut to separate the transmitter from the process.
Troubleshooting
67
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
6.3.2
Remove Feature Assembly
The Wireless Feature Board is located in the electronics compartment. To remove the assembly,
perform the following procedure.
1.
Remove the housing cover opposite the field terminal side.
2.
Remove the LCD Display, if applicable. To do this, hold in the two clips and pull outward.
3.
Loosen the two small screws located on the assembly.
4.
Replace the LCD Display. This will help in removing the assembly.
5.
Pull out the assembly to expose and locate the SuperModule connector and antenna
connector.
6.
Grasp antenna connector by the base and pull upwards to disconnect.
7.
Grasp the SuperModule connector, squeeze the clips and pull upwards
(avoid pulling wires).
Figure 6-1. Sensor module connector view
Wireless Housing
68
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
6.4
June 2012
Reassembly Procedures
important
The V-Seal must be installed at the bottom of the housing.
6.4.1
Reassemble the Process Flange
1.
Inspect the Teflon sensor module o-rings. If the o-rings are not damaged, reuse them.
Replace o-rings that show any signs of damage, such as nicks, cuts, or general wear.
Note
If you are replacing the o-rings, be careful not to scratch the o-ring grooves or the surface of the
isolating diaphragm when removing the damaged o-rings.
2.
Install the process flange on the sensor module. To hold the process flange in place,
install the two alignment screws to finger tight (screws are not pressure retaining). Do
not overtighten; this will affect module-to-flange alignment.
3.
Install the appropriate flange bolts.
a.
If the installation requires a 1/4–18 NPT mounting, use four 1.75-in. flange bolts. Go to
Step f.
b. If the installation requires a 1/2–14 NPT mounting, use four 2.88-in. process
flange/adapter bolts. For gage pressure configurations, use two 2.88-in. bolts and two
1.75-in. bolts. Go to Step d.
c.
If the installation uses a manifold (differential pressure applications only), use
appropriate bolts. Go to Step e.
d. Hold the flange adapters and adapter o-rings in place while finger-tightening the bolts.
Go to Step g.
e.
Align the process flange with the manifold.
f.
Finger tighten the bolts.
g. Tighten the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossed pattern. See Table 6-4 for
appropriate torque values.
h. Tighten the bolts to the final torque value using a crossed pattern. See Table 6-4 for
appropriate torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should extend through the
top of the module housing.
i.
Troubleshooting
If the installation uses a manifold, then install flange adapters on the process end of the
manifold using the 1.75-in. flange bolts supplied with the transmitter.
69
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 6-4. Bolt Installation
Torque Values
Bolt Material
Initial Torque Value
Final Torque Value
CS-ASTM-A445 Standard
300 in-lb. (34 N-m)
650 in-lb. (73 N-m)
316 SST—Option L4
150 in-lb. (17 N-m)
300 in-lb. (34 N-m)
ASTM-A-193-B7M—Option
L5
300 in-lb. (34 N-m)
650 in-lb. (73 N-m)
Alloy K-500—Option L6
300 in-lb. (34 N-m)
650 in-lb. (73 N-m)
ASTM-A-453-660—Option
L7
150 in-lb. (17 N-m)
300 in-lb. (34 N-m)
ASTM-A-193-B8M—Option
L8
150 in-lb. (17 N-m)
300 in-lb. (34 N-m)
4.
If you replaced the Teflon sensor module o-rings, re-torque the flange bolts after
installation to compensate for cold flow.
5.
Install the drain/vent valve.
a.
Apply sealing tape to the threads on the seat. Starting at the base of the valve with the
threaded end pointing toward the installer, apply two clockwise turns of sealing tape.
b. Take care to place the opening on the valve so that process fluid will drain toward the
ground and away from human contact when the valve is opened.
c.
Tighten the drain/vent valve to 250 in-lb. (28.25 N-m).
Note
After replacing o-rings on Range 1 transmitters and re-installing the process flange, expose the
transmitter to a temperature of 185 °F (85 °C) for two hours. Then re-tighten the flange bolts in
a cross pattern, and again expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 °F (85 °C) for two
hours before calibration.
70
Troubleshooting
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Appendix A
Specifications and
Reference Data
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 71
Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75
Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 79
Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 83
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 85
A.1
Specifications
A.2
Performance Specifications
For zero-based spans, reference conditions, silicone oil fill, glass-filled PTFE o-rings, SST
materials, Coplanar flange (2051C) or
/2 in.- 14 NPT (2051T) process connections, digital trim values set to equal range points.
Conformance to specification (±3 (Sigma))
Technology leadership, advanced manufacturing techniques and statistical process control
ensure specification conformance to ±3or better.
Digital Output
For wireless devices, use calibrated range in place of span.
Specifications and Reference Data
71
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Reference Accuracy(1)
Models(1)
Standard
2051CD,
2051CG
Range 0 (CD)
±0.10% of span
For spans less than 2:1, accuracy = ±0.05% of URL
Range 1
High Accuracy Option
±0.10% of span
For spans less than 15:1, accuracy =
URL
0.025 + 0.005 --------------- % of Span
Span
Ranges 2-5
±0.065% of span
For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =
URL
0.015 + 0.005 --------------- % of Span
Span
Ranges 2-4
High Accuracy Option, P8
±0.04% of span
For spans less than 5:1, accuracy =
URL
0.015 + 0.005 --------------- % of Span
Span
2051T
Ranges 1-4
±0.065% of span
For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =
URL
0.0075 --------------- % of Span
Span
Ranges 1-4
High Accuracy Option, P8
±0.04% of span
For spans less than 5:1, accuracy =
URL
0.0075 --------------- % of Span
Span
Range 5
2051CA
Ranges 1-4
±0.075% of span
±0.065% of span
For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =
URL
0.0075 --------------- % of Span
Span
Ranges 2-4
High Accuracy Option, P8
±0.04% of span
For spans less than 5:1, accuracy =
URL
0.0075 --------------- % of Span
Span
2051H/2051L
All Ranges
±0.075% of span
For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =
URL
0.025 + 0.005 --------------- % of Span
Span
(1) Total performance is determined by performing a root sum square calculation on reference accuracy, ambient temperature effect, and line pressure effect errors.
For FOUNDATION fieldbus transmitters, use calibrated range in place of span. For zero based spans, reference conditions, silicone oil fill, SST materials, Coplanar flange
(2051C) or 1/2 in. - 18 NPT (2051T) process connections, digital trim values set to equal range points.
Total Performance
For ±50 °F (28 °C) temperature changes, up to 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) line pressure (CD only), from 1:1 to 5:1 rangedown.
Models
2051C
2051T
72
Total Performance
Ranges 2-5
±0.15% of span
Ranges 1-4
±0.15% of span
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Long Term Stability
Models
Long Term Stability
2051C
Ranges 2-5
2051CD Low/Draft
Range
Ranges 0-1
2051T
Ranges 1-4
±0.125% of URL for 5 years
±50 °F (28 °C) temperature changes, and up to 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) line pressure.
±0.2% of URL for 1 year
±0.125% of URL for 5 years
±50 °F (28 °C) temperature changes, and up to 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) line pressure.
Dynamic Performance
4 - 20 mA
(HART
protocol)(1)
Fieldbus
protocol(3)
100 ms
255 ms
700 ms
100 ms
Consult factory
152 ms
307 ms
752 ms
152 ms
Consult factory
Typical HART Transmitter Response Time
Total Response Time (Td + Tc)(2):
2051C, Ranges 2-5:
Range 1:
Range 0:
2051T:
2051H/L:
Transmitter Output vs. Time
Pressure Released
Td
100%
Dead Time (Td)
45 ms (nominal)
97 ms
Update Rate
22 times per
second
22 times per
second
Tc
Td = Dead Time
Tc = Time Constant
Response Time = Td +Tc
63.2% of Total
Step Change
36.8%
0%
(1) Dead time and update rate apply to all models and ranges; analog output only
(2) Nominal total response time at 75 °F (24 °C) reference conditions.
(3) Transmitter fieldbus output only, segment macro-cycle not included.
Time
Line Pressure Effect per 1000 psi (6,9 MPa)(1)
Models(1)
Line Pressure Effect
2051CD
Zero Error(2)
±0.125% of URL/100 psi (6,89 bar)
Range 0
Range 1
Ranges 2-3
±0.25% of URL/1000 psi (68,9 bar)
±0.05% of URL/1000 psi (68,9 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 2000 psi (0 to 13,7 MPa)
Range 0
Span Error
±0.15% of reading/100 psi (6,89 bar)
Range 1
±0.4% of reading/1000 psi (68,9 bar)
Ranges 2-3
±0.1% of reading/1000 psi (68,9 bar)
2051HD
All Ranges
All Ranges
Zero Error(1)
±0.1% of URL/1000 psi (68,9 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 2000 psi (0 to 13,7 MPa)
Span Error
±0.1% of reading/1000 psi (68,9 bar)
(1) For zero error specifications for line pressures above 2000 psi (137,9 bar) or line pressure effect specifications for DP Ranges 4-5, see “Compensating for
Line Pressure (Range 4 and Range 5)” on page 50.
(2) Can be calibrated out at line pressure.
Specifications and Reference Data
73
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Ambient Temperature Effect per 50°F (28°C)
Models
2051CD/CG
2051T
Ambient Temperature Effect
Range 0
±(0.25% URL + 0.05% span)
Range 1
±(0.1% URL + 0.25% span)
Ranges 2-5
±(0.0125% URL + 0.0625% span) from 1:1 to 5:1
±(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 5:1 to 100:1
Range 1
±(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 1:1 to 10:1
±(0.05% URL + 0.125% span) from 10:1 to 100:1
Range 2-4
Range 5
2051CA
All Ranges
±(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 1:1 to 30:1
±(0.035% URL + 0.125% span) from 30:1 to 100:1
±(0.1% URL + 0.15% span)
±(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 1:1 to 30:1
±(0.035% URL + 0.125% span) from 30:1 to 100:1
2051L
See Rosemount Inc. Instrument Toolkit® software.
Mounting Position Effects
Models
Mounting Position Effects
2051C
Zero shifts up to ±1.25 inH2O (3,11 mbar), which can be calibrated out. No span effect.
2051L
With liquid level diaphragm in vertical plane, zero shift of up to 1 inH2O (2,49 mbar). With
diaphragm in horizontal plane, zero shift of up to 5 inH2O (12,43 mbar) plus extension length on
extended units. All zero shifts can be calibrated out. No span effect.
2051T/CA
Zero shifts up to 2.5 inH2O (6,22 mbar), which can be calibrated out. No span effect.
Vibration Effect
Less than ±0.1% of URL when tested per the requirements of IEC60770-1 field or pipeline with
high vibration level (10-60 Hz 0.21mm displacement peak amplitude / 60-2000 Hz 3g).
Power Supply Effect
Less than ±0.005% of calibrated span per volt.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Meets all relevant requirements of EN 61326 and NAMUR NE-21.
Transient Protection (Option Code T1)
Meets IEEE C62.41, Category Location B
6 kV crest (0.5 s - 100 kHz)
3 kV crest (8 × 20 microseconds)
6 kV crest (1.2 × 50 microseconds)
74
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
A.3
Functional Specifications
A.3.1
Range and Sensor Limits
Table A-1. 2051CD, 2051CG, 2051L, and 2051H Range and Sensor Limits
Range
Minimum Span
Range and Sensor Limits
Lower (LRL)
(1)
2051CD ,
CG, L, H
Upper
(URL)
2051C
Differential
2051C/
Gage
2051L
Differential
2051L
Gage
2051H
Differential
0.1 inH2O
(0,25 mbar)
0.5 inH2O
(1,2 mbar)
2.5 inH2O
(6,2 mbar)
10 inH2O
(24,9 mbar)
3 psi
(0,20 bar)
20 psi
(1,38 bar)
3.0 inH2O
(7,47 mbar)
25 inH2O
(62,3 mbar)
250 inH2O
(0,62 bar)
1000 inH2O
(2,49 bar)
300 psi
(20,6 bar)
2000 psi
(137,9 bar)
–3.0 inH2O
(-7,47 mbar)
–25 inH2O
(–62,1 mbar)
–250 inH2O
(–0,62 bar)
–1000 inH2O
(–2,49 bar)
–300 psi
(–20,6 bar)
– 2000 psi
(–137,9 bar)
NA
NA
NA
NA
–25 inH2O
(–62,1 mbar)
–250 inH2O
(–0,62 bar)
0.5 psia
(34,5 mbar abs)
0.5 psia
(34,5 mbar abs)
0.5 psia
(34,5 mbar abs)
NA
NA
NA
–250 inH2O
(–0,62 bar)
–1000 inH2O
(–2,49 bar)
–300 psi
(–20,6 bar)
NA
–250 inH2O
(–0,62 bar)
0.5 psia
(34,5 mbar abs)
0.5 psia
(34,5 mbar abs)
NA
–250 inH2O
(–0,62 bar)
–1000 inH2O
(–2,49 bar)
–300 psi
(–20,6 bar)
– 2000 psi
(–137,9 bar)
(1) Range 0 only available with 2051CD. Range 1 only available with 2051CD or 2051CG.
Zero and Span Adjustment Requirements
(HART and Low Power)
Zero and span values can be set anywhere within the range limits stated in Table A-1.
Span must be greater than or equal to the minimum span stated in Table A-1.
Service
Liquid, gas, and vapor applications
4–20 mA (Output Code A)
Output
Two-wire 4–20 mA, user-selectable for linear or square root output. Digital process variable
superimposed on 4–20 mA signal, available to any host that conforms to the HART protocol.
Power Supply
External power supply required. Standard transmitter (4–20 mA) operates on 10.5 to 55 V dc with
no load.
Specifications and Reference Data
75
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Load Limitations
Maximum loop resistance is determined by the voltage level of the external power supply, as
described by:
Load (Ohms)
Max. Loop Resistance = 43.5 (Power Supply Voltage – 10.5)
Operating
Region
Voltage (V dc)
Communication requires a minimum
loop resistance of 250 ohms.
(1) For CSA approval, power supply must not exceed 42.4 V.
Wireless Self-Organizing Networks
Output
WirelessHART, 2.4 GHz DSSS.
Local Display
The optional five-digit LCD can display user-selectable information such as primary variable in
engineering units, percent of range, sensor module temperature, and electronics temperature.
Display updates at up to once per minute.
Update Rate
User selectable, 1 sec. to 60 min.
Wireless Power Module
Field replaceable, keyed connection eliminates the risk of incorrect installation,
Intrinsically Safe Lithium-thionyl chloride Power Module (Green Power Module,
model number 701PGNKF) with polybutadine terephthalate (PBT) enclosure.
Ten-year life at one minute update rate.(1)
(1) Reference conditions are 70 °F (21 °C), and routing data for three additional network devices.
NOTE: Continuous exposure to ambient temperature limits of
-40 °F or 185 °F (-40 °C or 85 °C) may reduce specified life by less than 20 percent.
Overpressure Limits
Transmitters withstand the following limits without damage:
76
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Rosemount 2051CD/CG
Range 0: 750 psi (51,7 bar)
Range 1: 2000 psig (137,9 bar)
Ranges 2–5: 3626 psig (250 bar)
4500 psig (310,3 bar) for option code P9
Rosemount 2051CA
Range 1: 750 psia (51,7 bar)
Range 2: 1500 psia (103,4 bar)
Range 3: 1600 psia (110,3 bar)
Range 4: 6000 psia (413,7 bar)
Rosemount 2051H
All Ranges: 3626 psig (25 MPa)
Rosemount 2051TG/TA
Range 1: 750 psi (51,7 bar)
Range 2: 1500 psi (103,4 bar)
Range 3: 1600 psi (110,3 bar)
Range 4: 6000 psi (413,7 bar)
Range 5: 15000 psi (1034,2 bar)
Rosemount 2051L
Limit is flange rating or sensor rating, whichever is lower (see the table below).
Standard
Type
CS Rating
SST Rating
ANSI/ASME
ANSI/ASME
ANSI/ASME
Class 150
285 psig
275 psig
Class 300
740 psig
720 psig
Class 600
1480 psig
1440 psig
At 100 °F (38 °C), the rating decreases
with increasing temperature, per ANSI/ASME B16.5.
DIN
PN 10–40
40 bar
40 bar
DIN
PN 10/16
16 bar
16 bar
DIN
PN 25/40
40 bar
40 bar
At 248 °F (120 °C), the rating decreases with increasing temperature, per DIN 2401.
Static Pressure Limit
Rosemount 2051CD Only
Operates within specifications between static line pressures of 0.5 psia and 3626 psig (4500 psig
(310, 3 bar) for
Option Code P9).
Range 0: 0.5 psia and 750 psig (3, 4 bar and 51, 7 bar)
Range 1: 0.5 psia and 2000 psig (3, 4 bar and 137, 9 bar)
Specifications and Reference Data
77
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Burst Pressure Limits
Coplanar or traditional process flange
10000 psig (689,5 bar).
2051T:
Ranges 1–4: 11000 psi (758,4 bar)
Range 5: 26000 psig (1792,64 bar)
Temperature Limits
Ambient
–40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)
With LCD display(1): –40 to 175 °F (–40 to 80 °C)
(1) LCD display may not be readable and LCD updates will be slower at temperatures below -4 °F (-20 °C).
Storage
–40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)
With LCD display: –40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)
Process Temperature Limits
At atmospheric pressures and above.
2051C Coplanar
Silicone Fill Sensor(1)
with Coplanar Flange
with Traditional Flange
with Level Flange
with 305 Integral
Manifold
Inert Fill Sensor(1)
–40 to 250 °F (–40 to 121 °C)(2)
–40 to 300 °F (–40 to 149 °C)(2)(3)
–40 to 300 °F (–40 to 149 °C)(2)
–40 to 300 °F (–40 to 149 °C)(2)(3)
-40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)(4) (5)
2051T In-Line (Process Fill Fluid)
Silicone Fill Sensor(1)
Inert Fill Sensor(1)
–40 to 250 °F (–40 to 121 °C)(2)
–22 to 250 °F (–30 to 121 °C)(2)
2051L Low-Side Temperature Limits
Silicone Fill Sensor
Inert Fill Sensor(1)
(1)
–40 to 250 °F (–40 to 121 °C)(2)
0 to 185 °F (–18 to 85 °C)(2)
2051L High-Side Temperature Limits
(Process Fill Fluid)
Syltherm® XLT
D. C.® Silicone 704(6)
D. C. Silicone 200
Inert (Halocarbon)
Glycerin and Water
Neobee M-20®
78
–102 to 302 °F (–75 to 150 °C)
32 to 400 °F (0 to 205 °C)
–49 to 400 °F (–45 to 205 °C)
–49 to 320 °F (–45 to 160 °C)
5 to 203 °F (–15 to 95 °C)
5 to 400 °F (–15 to 205 °C)
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
2051C Coplanar
Propylene Glycol and
Water
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
5 to 203 °F (–15 to 95 °C)
Process temperatures above 185 °F (85 °C) require derating the ambient limits by a 1.5:1 ratio.
220 °F (104 °C) limit in vacuum service; 130 °F (54 °C) for pressures below 0.5 psia.
-20 °F (-29 °C) is the lower process temperature limit with option code P0.
160 °F (71 °C) limit in vacuum service.
Not available for 2051_CA.
Upper limit of 600 °F (315 °C) is available with 1199 seal assemblies mounted away from the transmitter
with the use of capillaries and up to 500 °F (260 °C) with direct mount extension.
Humidity Limits
0–100% relative humidity
Volumetric Displacement
Less than 0.005 in3 (0,08 cm3)
Damping
The Damping command introduces a delay in processing which increases the response time of
the transmitter; smoothing variations in output readings caused by rapid input changes. In the
2051 Wireless pressure transmitter, damping only takes effect when the device is placed in high
power refresh mode and during calibration. In normal power mode, the effective damping is 0.
Note that when the device is in high power refresh mode, battery power will be depleted rapidly.
A.4
Physical Specifications
Electrical Connections
/2–14 NPT, G1/2, and M20 x 1.5 (CM20) conduit. HART interface connections fixed to terminal
block.
Process Connections
2051C
/4–18 NPT on 21/8-in. centers
/2–14 NPT and RC 1/2 on 2-in. (50.8 mm), 21/8-in. (54.0 mm), or 21/4-in. (57.2 mm) centers
(process adapters)
2051T
/2–14 NPT female,
Non-Threaded instrument flange (available in SST for Range 1–4 transmitters only),
G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male (available in SST for Range 1–4 transmitters only), or
Autoclave type F-250-C (Pressure relieved 9/16–18 gland thread; 1/4 OD high pressure tube 60°
cone; available in SST for Range 5 transmitters only).
Specifications and Reference Data
79
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
2051L
High pressure side: 2-in.(50.8mm), 3-in. (72 mm), or 4-in. (102mm), ASME B 16.5 (ANSI) Class
150, 300 or 600 flange; 50, 80 or 100 mm, DIN 2501 PN 40 or 10/16 flange
Low pressure side: 1/4–18 NPT on flange, 1/2–14 NPT on process adapter
Process-Wetted Parts
Isolating Diaphragm
Material
2051CD/CG
2051T
2051CA
2051H
Process Isolating Diaphragms
316L SST
Alloy C-276
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Drain/Vent Valves
316 SST, Alloy C-276, or Alloy 400/K-500 material
(Alloy 400/K-500 is not available with 2051L).
Process Flanges and Adapters
Plated carbon steel
SST: CF-8M (Cast 316 SST) per ASTM A743
Cast C-276: CW-12MW per ASTM A494
Cast Alloy 400: M-30C per ASTM A494
Wetted O-rings
Glass-filled PTFE
(Graphite-filled PTFE with Isolating Diaphragm code 6)
2051L Process Wetted Parts
Flanged Process Connection (Transmitter High Side)
Process Diaphragms, Including Process Gasket Surface
316L SST, Alloy C-276, or Tantalum
Extension
CF-3M (Cast 316L SST, material per ASTM A743), or CW-12MW (Cast C-276, material ASTM
A494); fits schedule 40 and 80 pipe
Mounting Flange
Zinc-cobalt plated CS or 316 SST
80
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Reference Process Connection (Transmitter Low Side)
Isolating Diaphragms
316L SST or Alloy C-276
Reference Flange and Adapter
CF-8M (Cast version of 316 SST, material per ASTM-A743)
Non-Wetted Parts
Electronics Housing
Low-copper aluminum alloy or SST: CF-3M (Cast 316L SST) or CF-8M (Cast 316 SST)
NEMA 4X, IP66/68
Coplanar Sensor Module Housing
CF-3M (Cast version of 316L SST)
Bolts
Plated carbon steel per ASTM A449, Type 1
Austenitic 316 SST per ASTM F593
ASTM A453, Class D, Grade 660 SST
ASTM A193, Grade B7M alloy steel
ASTM A193, Class 2, Grade B8M SST
Alloy K-500
Sensor Module Fill Fluid
Silicone or inert halocarbon (Inert is not available with 2051CA). In-Line series uses Fluorinert®
FC-43.
Process Fill Fluid (Liquid Level Only)
2051L: Syltherm XLT, D.C. Silicone 704,
D.C. Silicone 200, inert, glycerin and water,
Neobee M-20, propylene glycol and water.
Paint
Polyurethane
Cover O-rings
Buna-N
Power Module
Field replaceable, keyed connection eliminates the risk of incorrect installation, Intrinsically Safe
Lithium-thionyl chloride Power Module (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF) with
PBT enclosure
Specifications and Reference Data
81
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Shipping Weights for 2051 Wireless Pressure Transmitter
Table A-2. Transmitter weights without options
Complete Transmitter(1)
Add Weight In lb (kg)
2051C with engineered polymer
housing
2051T with engineered polymer
housing
3.90 (1,8)
2.3 (1,0)
(1) Fully functional transmitter with terminal block, covers, and SST flange.
Table A-3. 2051L weights without options
Flange
Flush
lb. (kg)
2-in. Ext.
lb (kg)
4-in. Ext.
lb (kg)
6-in. Ext.
lb (kg)
2-in., 150
3-in., 150
4-in., 150
2-in., 300
3-in., 300
4-in., 300
2-in., 600
3-in., 600
DN 50 / PN 40
DN 80 / PN 40
DN 100 / PN 10/16
DN 100 / PN 40
6.1 (2,8)
12.3 (5,6)
17.8 (8,1)
7.9 (3,6)
16.2 (7,3)
27 (12,2)
9.4 (4,3)
18.7 (8,5)
7.9 (3,6)
12.6 (5,7)
7.8 (3,5)
9.2 (4,2)
—
13.0 (5,9)
17.5 (7,9)
—
16.9 (7,7)
26.9 (12,2)
—
19.4 (8,8)
—
13.3 (6,0)
8.5 (3,9)
9.9 (4,5)
—
14.2 (6,4)
18.7 (8,4)
—
18.1 (8,2)
28.1 (12,7)
—
20.6 (9,3)
—
14.5 (6,6)
9.7 (4,4)
11.1 (5,0)
—
15.5 (7,0)
20.0 (9,1)
—
19.4 (8,8)
29.4 (13,3)
—
21.9 (9,9)
—
15.8 (7,2)
11.0 (5,0)
12.4 (5,6)
Transmitter option weights
Option Code
Option
Add lb (kg)
B4
B1, B2, B3
B7, B8, B9
BA, BC
B4
F12, F22
F13, F23
E12, E22
F14, F24
F15, F25
G21
G22
G11
G12
G31
G41
SST Mounting Bracket for Coplanar Flange
Mounting Bracket for Traditional Flange
Mounting Bracket for Traditional Flange with SST Bolts
SST Bracket for Traditional Flange
SST Mounting Bracket for In-Line
SST Traditional Flange with SST Drain Vents(1)
Cast C-276 Traditional Flange with Alloy C-276 Drain Vents(1)
SST Coplanar Flange with SST Drain Vents(1)
Cast Alloy 400 Traditional Flange with Alloy 400/K-500 Drain Vents(1)
SST Traditional Flange with Alloy C-276 Drain Vents(1)
Level Flange—3 in., 150
Level Flange—3 in., 300
Level Flange—2 in., 150
Level Flange—2 in., 300
DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 50, PN 40
DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 80, PN 40
1.2 (0,5)
1.7 (0,8)
1.7 (0,8)
1.6 (0,7)
1.3 (0,6)
3.2 (1,5)
3.6 (1,6)
1.9 (0,9)
3.6 (1,6)
3.2 (1,5)
12.6 (5,7)
15.9 (7,2)
6.8 (3,1)
8.2 (3,7)
7.8 (3,5)
13.0 (5,9)
(1) Includes mounting bolts.
82
Item
Weight in lb. (kg)
Polymer Standard Cover
SST Standard Cover
Polymer Display Cover
SST Display Cover
Wireless Battery Cover
LCD Display(1)
Power Module
0.2 (0,09)
1.3 (0,6)
0.2 (0,09)
1.5 (0,7)
0.1 (0,04)
0.1 (0,04)
0.4 (0,18)
(1) Display only.
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
A.5
June 2012
Dimensional Drawings
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
Process adapters (option D2) and Rosemount 305 integral manifolds must be ordered with the
transmitter.
2051 Wireless Housing with In-Line and Coplanar SuperModule Platform
Specifications and Reference Data
83
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-4. 2051L Dimensional Specifications
Except where indicated, dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
Class
ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 150
Pipe
Size
Flange
Thickness
Extension O.D.
Bolt Hole Diameter(1) Gasket
Diameter D
Surface E
4.75 (121)
6.0 (152)
7.5 (191)
5.0 (127)
6.62 (168)
7.88 (200)
5.0 (127)
6.62 (168)
125 mm
160 mm
190 mm
180 mm
0.75 (19)
0.75 (19)
0.75 (19)
0.75 (19)
0.88 (22)
0.88 (22)
0.75 (19)
0.88 (22)
18 mm
18 mm
22 mm
18 mm
DIN 2501 PN 10/16
2 (51)
3 (76)
4 (102)
2 (51)
3 (76)
4 (102)
2 (51)
3 (76)
DN 50
DN 80
DN 100
DN 100
Class
Pipe
Size
Process
Side F
1/4 NPT
1/2 NPT
ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 150
2 (51)
2.12 (54)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
3 (76)
3.6 (91)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
4 (102)
3.6 (91)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
2 (51)
2.12 (54)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
3 (76)
3.6 (91)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
4 (102)
3.6 (91)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
2 (51)
2.12 (54)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
3 (76)
3.6 (91)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
DIN 2501 PN 10–40
DN 50
2.4 (61)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
DIN 2501 PN 25/40
DN 80
3.6 (91)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
DN 100
3.6 (91)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
DN 100
3.6 (91)
0.97 (25)
1.31 (33)
ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 300
ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 600
DIN 2501 PN 10–40
DIN 2501 PN 25/40
ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 300
ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 600
DIN 2501 PN 10/16
(1)
84
0.69 (18)
0.88 (22)
0.88 (22)
0.82 (21)
1.06 (27)
1.19 (30)
1.00 (25)
1.25 (32)
20 mm
24 mm
24 mm
20 mm
Bolt Circle Outside
No.
Diameter Diameter of
Bolts
6.0 (152)
7.5 (191)
9.0 (229)
6.5 (165)
8.25 (210)
10.0 (254)
6.5 (165)
8.25 (210)
165 mm
200 mm
235 mm
220 mm
NA
2.58 (66)
3.5 (89)
NA
2.58 (66)
3.5 (89)
NA
2.58 (66)
NA
65 mm
89 mm
89 mm
3.6 (92)
5.0 (127)
6.2 (158)
3.6 (92)
5.0 (127)
6.2 (158)
3.6 (92)
5.0 (127)
4.0 (102)
5.4 (138)
6.2 (158)
6.2 (158)
Lower Housing G
6.66
(169)
6.66
(169)
6.66
(169)
6.66
(169)
6.66
(169)
6.66
(169)
8.66
(219)
8.66
(219)
6.66
(169)
6.66
(169)
6.66
(169)
6.66
(169)
Tolerances are 0.040 (1,02), –0.020 (0,51).
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
A.6
Ordering Information
Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
2051C
Transmitter Type
Coplanar Pressure Transmitter
Measurement Type
Standard
Differential
Gage
Expanded
Absolute
Standard
★
★
Pressure Range
Standard
2051CD
2051CG
2051CA
–25 to 25 inH2O
(–62.2 to 62.2 mbar)
–250 to 250 inH2O
(–623 to 623 mbar)
–1000 to 1000 inH2O
(–2.5 to 2.5 bar)
–300 to 300 psi
(–20.7 to 20.7 bar)
–2000 to 2000 psi
(–137.9 to137.9 bar)
–25 to 25 inH2O
(–62,1 to 62.2 mbar)
–250 to 250 inH2O
(–621 to 623 mbar)
–393 to 1000 inH2O
(–0.98 to 2.5 bar)
–14.2 to 300 psi
(–0.98 to 20.7 bar)
–14.2 to 2000 psi
(–0.98 to 137.9 bar)
0 to 30 psia
(0 to 2.1 bar)
0 to 150 psia
(0 to 10.3 bar)
0 to 800 psia
(0 to 55.2 bar)
0 to 4000 psia
(0 to 275.8 bar)
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Expanded
0(1)
–3 to 3 inH2O
(–7.5 to 7.5 mbar)
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
Transmitter Output
Standard
W(2)
Standard
★
★
★
4–20 mA with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol
Profibus PA Protocol
Wireless
Expanded
Low-Power, 1–5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (See Option C2 for 0.8–3.2 V dc)
★
Materials of Construction
Process Flange Type
Flange Material
Standard
Coplanar
3(3)
7(3)
8(3)
Coplanar
Cast C-276
Coplanar
Cast Alloy 400
Coplanar
Plated CS
Coplanar
SST
Coplanar
Plated CS
Alternate Process Connection
Specifications and Reference Data
SST
Drain/Vent
SST
Alloy C-276
Alloy 400/K-500
SST
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
85
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Isolating Diaphragm
Standard
2(3)
3(3)
Expanded
Standard
★
★
316L SST
Alloy C-276
Alloy 400
Tantalum (Available on 2051CD and CG, Ranges 2–5 only. Not available on 2051CA)
Gold-plated Alloy 400 (Use in combination with O-ring Option Code B.)
Gold-plated SST
O-ring
Standard
Standard
★
★
Glass-filled PTFE
Graphite-filled PTFE
Sensor Fill Fluid
Standard
Silicone
Inert (Differential and Gage only)
Housing Material
Standard
Expanded
A.6.1
Standard
★
★
Conduit Entry Size
Aluminum
Aluminum
SST
SST
Engineered Polymer
½–14 NPT
M20 × 1.5
½–14 NPT
M20 × 1.5
N/A
Aluminum
SST
G½
G½
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
Options (Include with selected model number)
Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol
Standard
WA3
Standard
★
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART
Antenna and SmartPower
Standard
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
Standard
★
Plantweb Control Functionality
Standard
A01
FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite
Standard
★
Plantweb Diagnostic Functionality
Standard
D01
86
FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostics Suite
Standard
★
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Alternate Flange(4)
Standard
H2
H3(3)
H4
H7(3)
HJ
FA
FB
FC
FD
FP
FQ
Expanded
HK(5)
HL
Traditional Flange, 316 SST, SST Drain/Vent
Traditional Flange, Alloy C, Alloy C-276 Drain/Vent
Traditional Flange, Cast Alloy 400, Alloy 400/K-500 Drain/Vent
Traditional Flange, 316 SST, Alloy C-276 Drain/Vent
DIN Compliant Traditional Flange, SST, 1/16 in. Adapter/Manifold Bolting
Level Flange, SST, 2 in., ANSI Class 150, Vertical Mount
Level Flange, SST, 2 in., ANSI Class 300, Vertical Mount
Level Flange, SST, 3 in., ANSI Class 150, Vertical Mount
Level Flange, SST, 3 in., ANSI Class 300, Vertical Mount
DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 50, PN 40, Vertical Mount
DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 80, PN 40, Vertical Mount
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
DIN Compliant Traditional Flange, SST, 10 mm Adapter/Manifold Bolting
DIN Compliant Traditional Flange, SST, 12mm Adapter/Manifold Bolting (Not available on 2051CD0)
Manifold Assembly(5)(9)
Standard
S5
S6
Assemble to Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold
Assemble to Rosemount 304 Manifold or Connection System
Standard
★
★
Integral Mount Primary Element(5)(9)
Standard
S4(6)
S3
Assemble to Rosemount Annubar or Rosemount 1195 Integral Orifice
Assemble to Rosemount 405 Compact Orifice Plate
Standard
★
★
Seal Assemblies(9)
Standard
S1(7)
S2(8)
Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 seal
Assemble to two Rosemount 1199 seals
Standard
★
★
All-Welded Seal Assemblies (for high vacuum applications)(9)
Standard
S0
S7
S8
S9
One Seal, All-Welded System (Direct Mount Connection Type)
One Seal, All-Welded System (Capillary Connection Type)
Two Seals, All-Welded System (Capillary Connection Type)
Two Seals, All-Welded System (One Direct Mount and One Capillary Connection Type)
Specifications and Reference Data
Standard
★
★
★
★
87
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Mounting Bracket
Standard
B1
B2
B3
B4
B7
B8
B9
BA
BC
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Traditional Flange Bracket for 2-in. Pipe Mounting, CS Bolts
Traditional Flange Bracket for Panel Mounting, CS Bolts
Traditional Flange Flat Bracket for 2-in. Pipe Mounting, CS Bolts
Coplanar Flange Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting, all SST
B1 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts
B2 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts
B3 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts
SST B1 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts
SST B3 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts
Product Certifications
Standard
C6
E2(11)
E3(11)
E4(10)
E5
E7(11)
E8
I1(11)
I2(11)
I3
I4(12)
I5
I7(11)
IA
IE
K2(11)
K5
K6(11)
K7(11)
K8(11)
KB
KD(11)
N1(11)
N3
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2
INMETRO Flameproof
Chine Flameproof
TIIS Flame-proof
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-Proof
IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof
ATEX Flameproof and Dust Certification
ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust
INMETRO Intrinsic Safety
China Intrinsic Safety
TIIS Intrinsic Safety
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only
FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only
INMETRO Flameproof, Instrinsic Safety
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-Proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2
CSA and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of C6 and K8)
IECEx Flame-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, and Type n (combination of I7, N7, and E7)
ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1)
FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition Proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of K5 and
C6)
FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8)
ATEX Type n Certification and Dust
China Type n
N7(11)
IECEx Type n Certification
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Drinking Water Approval
Standard
DW(13)
NSF drinking water approval
Standard
★
Shipboard Approvals
Standard
SBS
88
American Bureau of Shipping
Standard
★
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Custody Transfer
Standard
C5(16)
Measurement Canada Accuracy Approval (Limited availability depending on transmitter type and range. Contact an
Standard
★
Emerson Process Management representative)
Bolting Material
Standard
L4
L5
L6
Austenitic 316 SST Bolts
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Bolts
Alloy K-500 Bolts
Standard
★
★
★
Display and Interface Options
Standard
M4(14)
M5
M6
LCD Display with Local Operator Interface
LCD Display for Aluminum Housing (Housing Codes A, B, C, and D only)
LCD Display for SST Housing (Housing Codes J, K, L, and M only)
Standard
★
★
★
Calibration Certificate
Standard
Q4
QG
QP
Calibration Certificate
Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate
Calibration certification and tamper evident seal
Standard
★
★
★
Material Traceability Certification
Standard
Q8
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B
Standard
★
Quality Certification for Safety
Standard
QS(15)
QT
Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data
Safety certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA data
Standard
★
★
Hardware Adjustments
Standard
D1
DZ
Hardware adjustments (zero, span, alarm, security)
Digital Zero Trim
Standard
★
★
Hardware Adjustments
Standard
J1(16)(17)
J3(16)(17)
Local Zero Adjustment Only
No Local Zero or Span Adjustment
Standard
★
★
Transient Protection Terminal Block
Standard
T1(18)
Transient Protection Terminal Block
Standard
★
Software Configuration
Standard
C1(16)
Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order)
Standard
★
Low Power Output
Expanded
C2
0.8–3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (Output Code M only)
Specifications and Reference Data
89
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Gage Pressure Calibration
Standard
C3
Standard
★
Gage Calibration (Model 2051CA4 only)
Alarm Limit
Standard
C4(16)(19) Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, Alarm High
CN(16)(19) Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, Alarm Low
Standard
★
★
Pressure Testing
Expanded
P1
Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate
Cleaning Process Area
Expanded
P2
Cleaning for Special Service
P3
Cleaning for <1 PPM Chlorine/Fluorine
Pressure Calibration
Expanded
P4
Calibrate at Line Pressure (Specify Q48 on order for corresponding certificate)
Performance
Standard
P8(20)
High Performance Option
Standard
★
Flange Adapters
Standard
DF(21)
D3
D3
/2 -14 NPT flange adapter(s)
¼–18 NPT Process Connections (No flange adapters), Hastelloy
¼–18 NPT Process Connections (No flange adapters), Monel
Standard
★
Vent/Drain Valves
Expanded
D7
Coplanar Flange Without Drain/Vent Ports
Conduit Plug
Standard
DO(22)
316 SST Conduit Plug
Standard
★
RC1/4 RC1/2 Process Connection
Expanded
D9(23)
RC ¼ Flange with RC ½ Flange Adapter, CS - SST
D9
JIS Process Connection—RC ¼ Flange with RC ½ Flange Adapter, 316SST
Max Static Line Pressure
Standard
P9
4500 psig (310 bar) Static Pressure Limit (2051CD Ranges 2–5 only)
Standard
★
Ground Screw
Standard
(24)
V5
90
Standard
External Ground Screw Assembly
★
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Surface Finish
Standard
Q16
Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals
Standard
★
Toolkit Total System Performance Reports
Standard
QZ
Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report
Standard
★
Conduit Electrical Connector
Standard
GE
GM
M12, 4-pin, Male Connector (eurofast®)
A size Mini, 4-pin, Male Connector (minifast®)
Standard
★
★
Typical Model Number: 2051CD 2 A 2 2 A 1 A B4$13857 780
(1) 2051CD0 is available only with Output Code A, Process Flange Code 0 (Alternate Flange H2, H7, HJ, or HK), Isolating Diaphragm Code 2, O-ring Code A, and Bolting Option L4.
(2) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration.
(3) Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain
materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(4) Requires 0 code in Materials of Construction for Alternate Process Connection.
(5) Not valid with optional code P9 for 4500 psi Static Pressure.
(6) Process Flange limited to Coplanar (codes 2, 3, 5, 7, 8) or Traditional (H2, H3, H7).
(7) Not valid with optional code D9 for RC1/2 Adaptors.
(8) Not valid for optional codes DF and D9 for Adaptors.
(9) “Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
(10) Available only with output codes A - 4-20 HART and F - FOUNDATION fieldbus.
(11) Not available with Low Power code M.
(12) Available only with 2051CD and 2051CG and output code A - 4-20 mA HART
(13) Not available with Alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all cast C-276 flanges, all plated CS flanges, all DIN flanges, all Level flanges, assemble-to
manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3 and S4 codes), surface finish certification (Q16 code), and remote seal
system report (QZ code).
(14) Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.
(15) Only available with HART 4-20 mA output (output code A).
(16) Not available with Fieldbus (output code F) or Profibus (output code W).
(17) Local zero and span adjustments are standard unless Option Code J1 or J3 is specified
(18) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA and IE.
(19) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
(20) High Performance Option includes 0.04% Reference Accuracy. See Performance Specifications for details.
(21) Not valid with Alternate Process Connection options S3, S4, S5, and S6.
(22) Transmitter is shipped with 316 SST conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug.
(23) Not available with Alternate Process Connection; DIN Flanges and Level Flanges.
(24) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.
Specifications and Reference Data
91
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-6. 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model Transmitter Type
2051T
In-Line Pressure Transmitter
Pressure Type
Standard
Gage
Absolute
Standard
★
★
Pressure Range
Standard
2051TG(1)
2051TA
-14.7 to 30 psi (-1.0 to 2.1 bar)
-14.7 to 150 psi (-1.0 to 10.3 bar)
-14.7 to 800 psi (-1.0 to 55 bar)
-14.7 to 4000 psi (-1.0 to 276 bar)
-14.7 to 10000 psi (-1.0 to 689 bar)
0 to 30 psia (0 to 2.1 bar)
0 to 150 psia (0 to 10.3 bar)
0 to 800 psia (0 to 55 bar)
0 to 4000 psia (0 to 276 bar)
0 to 10000 psia (0 to 689 bar)
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
Transmitter Output
Standard
4–20 mA with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol
W(2)
Profibus PA Protocol
Wireless
Expanded
Low-Power 1–5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
Standard
★
★
★
★
Process Connection Style
Standard
2B
/2–14 NPT Female
2C
G½ A DIN 16288 Male (Available in SST for Range 1–4 only)
Expanded
2F
Coned and Threaded, Compatible with Autoclave Type F-250-C (Range 5 only)
61
Non-threaded Instrument flange (Range 1-4 only)
Standard
★
★
Isolating Diaphragm
Process Connection Wetted Parts Material
Standard
2(3)
316L SST
3(3)
Alloy C-276
316L SST
Alloy C-276
Standard
★
★
Sensor Fill Fluid
Standard
Silicone
Inert
Housing Material
Standard
Aluminum
Aluminum
SST
SST
Engineered Polymer with Aluminum Module Material
Engineered Polymer with SST Module Material
Expanded
Aluminum
SST
92
Standard
★
★
Conduit Entry Size
½–14 NPT
M20 × 1.5
½–14 NPT
M20 × 1.5
N/A
N/A
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
G½
G½
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-6. 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
A.6.2
Options (Include with selected model number)
Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol
Standard
WA3
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART
Standard
★
Antenna and SmartPower
Standard
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
Standard
★
PlantWeb Control Functionality
Standard
A01
Advanced Control Function Block Suite
Standard
★
PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality
Standard
D01
FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostics Suite
Standard
★
Manifold Assemblies
Standard
S5(4)
Assemble to Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold
Standard
★
Seal Assemblies
Standard
S1(4)
Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 seal
Standard
★
Mounting Bracket
Standard
B4
Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting, All SST
Standard
★
Product Certifications
Standard
C6
E2
E3
E4(5)
E5
E7(5)
E8
I1(5)
I2
I3
I5
I7(5)
IA
IE
K2
K5
K6(5)
K7(5)
K8(5)
KB
KD(5)
N1(5)
N3
N7(5)
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2
INMETRO Flameproof
China Flameproof
TIIS Flameproof
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof
IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof
ATEX Flameproof and Dust Certification
ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust
INMETRO Intrinsic Safety
China Intrinsic Safety
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
ATEX Intrinsic Safety for FISCO; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only
FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only
INMETRO Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2
CSA and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of C6 and K8)
IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, and Type n (combination of I7, N7, and E7)
ATEX Flame-proof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1)
FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of K5 and
C6)
FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8)
ATEX Type n Certification and Dust
China Type n
IECEx Type n Certification
Specifications and Reference Data
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
93
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-6. 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Drinking Water Approval
Standard
DW(6)
NSF drinking water approval
Standard
★
Shipboard Approvals
Standard
SBS
American Bureau of Shipping
Standard
★
Custody Transfer
Standard
C5
Measurement Canada Accuracy Approval (Limited availability depending on transmitter type and range.
Contact an Emerson Process Management representative)
Standard
★
Calibration Certification
Standard
Q4
Calibration Certificate
QG
Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate
QP
Calibration Certification and tamper evident seal
Standard
★
★
★
Material Traceability Certification
Standard
Standard
★
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B
Q8
Quality Certification for Safety
Standard
QS(7)
Prior-use certificate of FMEDA Data
Standard
★
Zero/Span Adjustment
Standard
J1(8)(9)
(8)(9)
J3
DZ
Standard
★
★
★
Local Zero Adjustment Only
No Local Zero or Span Adjustment
Digital Zero Trim
Expanded
D1
Hardware adjustments (zero, span, alarm, security)
Display and Interface Options
Standard
M4(10)
LCD Display with Local Operator Interface
M5
LCD Display
M6
LCD Display for SST Housing (Housing Codes J, K, L and M only)
Standard
★
★
★
Conduit Plug
Standard
DO(11)
316 SST Conduit Plug
Standard
★
Transient Terminal Block
Standard
T1(12)
Transient Protection Terminal Block
Standard
★
Software Configuration
Standard
C1(8)
Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order)
Expanded
C2(8)
0.8–3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (Output Code M only)
Standard
★
Alarm Limit
Standard
(8)(13)
C4
(8)(13)
CN
94
Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, Alarm High
Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, Low Alarm
Standard
★
★
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Table A-6. 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Pressure Testing
Expanded
P1
Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate
Cleaning Process Area(14)
Expanded
P2
Cleaning for Special Service
P3
Cleaning for <1 PPM Chlorine/Fluorine
Performance
Standard
P8(15)
High Performance Option
Standard
★
Ground Screw
Standard
V5(16)
External Ground Screw Assembly
Standard
★
Surface Finish
Standard
Q16
Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals
Standard
★
Toolkit Total System Performance Reports
Standard
QZ
Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report
Standard
★
Conduit Electrical Connector
Standard
GE
M12, 4-pin, Male Connector (eurofast®)
GM
A size Mini, 4-pin, Male Connector (minifast®)
Typical Model
Number:
Standard
★
★
2051T G 5 F 2A 2 1 A B4
(1) 2051TG lower range limit varies with atmospheric pressure.
(2) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration.
(3) Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain
materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(4) “Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
(5) Not available with low-power Option Code M.
(6) Not available with Alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all cast C-276 flanges, all plated CS flanges, all DIN flanges, all Level flanges, assemble-to
manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3 and S4 codes), surface finish certification (Q16 code), and remote seal
system report (QZ code).
(7) Only available with HART 4-20 mA output (output code A).
(8) Not available with fieldbus (output code F) or Profibus protocols (output code W).
(9) Local zero and span adjustments are standard unless Option Code J1 or J3 is specified.
(10) Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.
(11) Transmitter is shipped with 316 SST conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug.
(12) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA and IE.
(13) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
(14) Not valid with Alternate Process Connection S5.
(15) High Performance Option includes 0.04% Reference Accuracy. See Performance Specifications for details.
(16) The V5 option is not needed with T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.
Specifications and Reference Data
95
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Transmitter Type
2051L
Liquid Level Transmitter
Pressure Range
Standard
Standard
★
★
★
–250 to 250 inH2O (–0,6 to 0,6 bar)
–1000 to 1000 inH2O (–2,5 to 2,5 bar)
–300 to 300 psi (–20,7 to 20,7 bar)
Transmitter Output
Standard
Standard
★
★
★
★
W(1)
Expanded
4–20 mA with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol
Profibus PA Protocol
Wireless
Low-Power 1–5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (See Option Code C2 for 0.8–3.2 V dc Output)
Process Connection Size, Material, Extension length (High Side)
Standard
Code
(2)
G0
H0(2)
J0
A0(2)
A2(2)
A4(2)
A6(2)
B0(2)
B2(2)
B4(2)
B6(2)
C0(2)
C2(2)
C4(2)
C6(2)
D0(2)
D2(2)
D4(2)
D6(2)
E0
F0
Standard
Process Connection Size
Material
Extension Length
★
2-in./DN 50
2-in./DN 50
2-in./DN 50
3-in./DN 80
3-in./DN 80
3-in./DN 80
3-in./DN 80
4-in./DN 100
4-in./DN 100
4-in./DN 100
4-in./DN 100
3-in./DN 80
3-in./DN 80
3-in./DN 80
3-in./DN 80
4-in./DN 100
4-in./DN 100
4-in./DN 100
4-in./DN 100
3-in./DN 80
4-in./DN 100
316L SST
Alloy C-276
Tantalum
316L SST
316L SST
316L SST
316L SST
316L SST
316L SST
316L SST
316L SST
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Tantalum
Tantalum
Flush Mount Only
Flush Mount Only
Flush Mount Only
Flush Mount
2-in./50 mm
4-in./100 mm
6-in./150 mm
Flush Mount
2-in./50 mm
4-in./100 mm
6-in./150 mm
Flush Mount
2-in./50 mm
4-in./100 mm
6-in./150 mm
Flush Mount
2-in./50 mm
4-in./100 mm
6-in./150 mm
Flush Mount Only
Flush Mount Only
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Mounting Flange Size, Rating, Material (High Side)
Size
Rating
Material
2-in.
3-in.
4-in.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
CS
CS
CS
Standard
96
Standard
★
★
★
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
X(2)
F(2)
G(2)
Y(2)
H(2)
J(2)
Z(2)
L(2)
K(2)
T(2)
U(2)
W(2)
7(2)
Expanded
2-in.
3-in.
4-in.
2-in.
3-in.
2-in.
3-in.
4-in.
2-in.
3-in.
4-in.
2-in.
3-in.
DN 50
DN 80
DN 100
DN 100
DN 50
DN 80
DN 100
DN 100
4 in.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600
PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1
PN 40 per EN 1092-1
PN 40 per EN 1092-1
PN 10/16 per EN 1092-1
PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1
PN 40 per EN 1092-1
PN 40 per EN 1092-1
PN 10/16 per EN 1092-1
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
SST
SST
SST
SST
SST
SST
SST
SST
CS
CS
CS
CS
SST
SST
SST
SST
SST
4(2)
5(2)
6(2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
10K per JIS B2238
20K per JIS B2238
40K per JIS B2238
10K per JIS B2238
20K per JIS B2238
40K per JIS B2238
CS
CS
CS
316 SST
316 SST
316 SST
Seal Fill Fluid (High Side)
Specific Gravity
Temperature Limits (Ambient Temperature of
70° F (21° C))
Standard
Standard
Syltherm XLT
Silicone 704
Silicone 200
Inert (Halocarbon)
Glycerine and
Water
Neobee M-20
Propylene Glycol
and Water
0.85
1.07
0.93
1.85
1.13
-102 to 293 °F (-75 to 145 °C)
32 to 401 °F (0 to 205 °C)
-49 to 401 °F (-45 to 205 °C)
-49 to 320 °F (-45 to 160 °C)
5 to 203 °F (-15 to 95 °C)
★
★
★
★
★
0.92
1.02
5 to 401 °F (-15 to 205 °C)
5 to 203 F (-15 to 95 °C)
★
★
Low Pressure Side
Configuration
Flange
Adapter
Diaphragm Material
Sensor Fill Fluid
Standard
(2)
11
21(2)
22(2)
Standard
Gage
Differential
Differential
SST
SST
SST
Specifications and Reference Data
316L SST
316L SST
Alloy C-276
Silicone
Silicone
Silicone
★
★
★
97
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
2A(2)
2B(2)
31(2)
Differential
Differential
Tuned-System
Assembly with
Remote Seal
SST
SST
None
316L SST
Alloy C-276
316L SST
Inert (Halocarbon)
Inert (Halocarbon)
Silicone
(Requires Option Code S1)
★
★
★
O-ring
Standard
Standard
Glass-filled PTFE
Housing Material
Standard
★
Conduit Entry Size
Standard
Expanded
Aluminum
Aluminum
SST
SST
Engineered Polymer
½–14 NPT
M20 × 1.5
½–14 NPT
M20 × 1.5
N/A
Aluminum
SST
G½
G½
A.6.3
★
★
★
★
★
Options (Include with selected model number)
Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol
Standard
WA3
Standard
★
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART
Antenna and SmartPower
Standard
WP5
Standard
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
★
PlantWeb Control Functionality
Standard
(3)
A01
Standard
FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite
★
PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality
Standard
(3)
D01
Standard
FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostics Suite
★
Seal Assemblies
Standard
S1(4)
Standard
Assembled to One Rosemount 1199 Seal (Requires 1199M)
★
Product Certifications
Standard
E5
I5
K5
I1(5)
(5)
N1
E8
E4(5)
C6
98
Standard
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2
ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust
ATEX Type n Certification and Dust
ATEX Flameproof and Dust Certification
TIIS Flameproof
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
(5)
K6
KB
K7(5)
K8(5)
KD(5)
I7(5)
E7(5)
N7(5)
IA
IE
E2
I2
K2
E3
I3
N3
CSA and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of C6 and K8)
FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of K5
and C6)
IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, and Type n (combination of I7, N7 and E7)
ATEX Flame-proof and Intrinsic Safety Approvals (combination of I1 and E8)
FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8)
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof
IECEx Type n Certification
ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety
FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe
INMETRO Flameproof
INMETRO Intrinsic Safety
INMETRO Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety
China Flameproof
China Intrinsic Safety
China Type n
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Shipboard Approvals
Standard
SBS
Standard
American Bureau of Shipping
★
Bolting Material
Standard
L4
L5
L6
L8
Standard
Austenitic 316 SST Bolts
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M bolts
Alloy K-500 Bolts
ASTM A 193 Class 2, Grade B8M Bolts
★
★
★
★
Display and Interface Options
Standard
(6)
M4
M5
M6
Standard
LCD Display with Local Operator Interface
LCD Display for Aluminum Housing (Housing Codes A, B, C, and D only)
LCD Display for SST Housing (Housing Codes J, K, L, and M only)
★
★
★
Calibration Certification
Standard
Q4
QP
QG
Standard
Calibration Certificate
Calibration Certificate and tamper evident seal
Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate
★
★
★
Material Traceability Certification
Standard
Q8
Standard
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1
★
Quality Certification for Safety
Standard
(7)
QS
Standard
Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data
★
Toolkit Total System Performance Reports
Standard
QZ
Standard
Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report
Specifications and Reference Data
★
99
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Conduit Electrical Connector
Standard
GE
GM
Standard
★
★
®
M12, 4-pin, Male Connector (eurofast )
A size Mini, 4-pin, Male Connector (minifast®)
Hardware Adjustments
Standard
(8)(9)
J1
(8)(9)
J3
DZ
Standard
★
★
★
Local Zero Adjustment Only
No Local Zero or Span Adjustment
Digital Zero Trim
Transient Protection
Standard
T1(10)
Standard
★
Transient Protection Terminal Block
Software Configuration
Standard
(8)
C1
Standard
Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order)
★
Low Power Output
Standard
(8)
C2
Standard
0.8–3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (Available with Output code M only)
★
Alarm Limit
Standard
(8)(11)
C4
(8)(11)
CN
Standard
★
★
NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm
NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, low alarm
Conduit Plug
Standard
DO
Standard
★
316 SST Conduit Plug
Ground Screw
Standard
(12)
V5
Standard
★
External Ground Screw Assembly
Lower Housing Flushing Connection Options
Ring Material
Number
Size (NPT)
Standard
F1
F2
F3
F4
F7
F8
F9
F0
Standard
316 SST
316 SST
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
316 SST
316 SST
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
/4-18 NPT
/4-18 NPT
/4-18 NPT
/4-18 NPT
/2-14 NPT
/2-14 NPT
/2-14 NPT
/2-14 NPT
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Typical Model Number: 2051L 2 A A0 D 21 A A F1
(1) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration.
(2) Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements highlighted within NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental
limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(3) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F.
100
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
June 2012
“Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
Not available with low-power Option Code M
Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.
Only available with HART 4-20 mA output (output code A).
Not available with fieldbus (output code F) or profibus protocols (output code W).
Local zero and span adjustments are standard unless Option Code J1 or J3 is specified.
The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA, IE, IF, and IG.
NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.
Specifications and Reference Data
101
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Product Description
2051CFA
Annubar Flowmeter
Measurement Type
Standard
Differential Pressure
Standard
★
Liquid
Gas
Steam
Standard
★
★
★
2-in. (50 mm)
21/2-in. (63.5 mm)
3-in. (80 mm)
31/2-in. (89 mm)
4-in. (100 mm)
5-in. (125 mm)
6-in. (150 mm)
7-in. (175 mm)
8-in. (200 mm)
10-in. (250 mm)
12-in. (300 mm)
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Fluid Type
Standard
Line Size
Standard
020
025
030
035
040
050
060
070
080
100
120
Expanded
140
160
180
200
240
300
360
420
480
600
720
780
840
900
960
14-in. (350 mm)
16-in. (400 mm)
18-in. (450 mm)
20-in. (500 mm)
24-in. (600 mm)
30-in. (750 mm)
36-in. (900 mm)
42-in. (1066 mm)
48-in. (1210 mm)
60-in. (1520 mm)
72-in. (1820 mm)
78-in (1950 mm)
84-in. (2100 mm)
90-in. (2250 mm)
96-in (2400 mm)
Pipe I.D. Range
Standard
Expanded
102
Range C from the Pipe I.D. table
Range D from the Pipe I.D. table
Standard
★
★
Range A from the Pipe I.D. table
Range B from the Pipe I.D. table
Range E from the Pipe I.D. table
Non-standard Pipe I.D. Range or Line Sizes greater than 12 inches
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Pipe Material / Mounting Assembly Material
Standard
Expanded
Carbon steel (A105)
316 Stainless Steel
No Mounting (Customer Supplied)
Standard
★
★
★
Chrome-Moly Grade F-11
Chrome-Moly Grade F-22
Chrome-Moly Grade F-91
Piping Orientation
Standard
Horizontal Piping
Vertical Piping with Downwards Flow
Vertical Piping with Upwards Flow
Standard
★
★
★
Annubar Type
Standard
Expanded
Pak-Lok
Flanged with opposite side support
Standard
★
★
Flange-Lok
Gear-Drive Flo-Tap
Manual Flo-Tap
Sensor Material
Standard
316 Stainless Steel
Expanded
Alloy C-276
Standard
★
Sensor Size
Standard
Sensor size 1 — Line sizes 2-in. (50 mm) to 8-in. (200 mm)
Sensor size 2 — Line sizes 6-in. (150 mm) to 96-in. (2400 mm)
Sensor size 3 — Line sizes greater than 12-in. (300 mm)
Standard
★
★
★
Mounting Type
Standard
T1
A1
A3
A6
D1
D3
D6
Compression or Threaded Connection
150# RF ANSI
300# RF ANSI
600# RF ANSI
DN PN16 Flange
DN PN40 Flange
DN PN100 Flange
Specifications and Reference Data
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
103
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Expanded
A9(1)
AF(1)
AT(1)
R1
R3
R6
R9(1)
RF(1)
RT(1)
900# RF ANSI
1500# RF ANSI
2500 # RF ANSI
150# RTJ Flange
300# RTJ Flange
600# RTJ Flange
900# RTJ Flange
1500# RTJ Flange
2500# RTJ Flange
Opposite Side Support or Packing Gland
Standard
Expanded
No opposite side support or packing gland (Required for Pak-Lok and Flange-Lok models)
Opposite Side Support – Required for Flanged Models
NPT Threaded Opposite Support Assembly – Extended Tip
Welded Opposite Support Assembly – Extended Tip
Packing Gland – Required for Flo-Tap Models
Packing Gland Material
Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple
Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple
Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple
Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple
Alloy C-276 Packing Gland / Cage Nipple
Rod Material
Carbon Steel
Stainless Steel
Carbon Steel
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Standard
★
★
★
Packing Material
PTFE
PTFE
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Isolation Valve for Flo-Tap Models
Standard
Expanded
Standard
★
Not Applicable or Customer Supplied
Gate Valve, Carbon Steel
Gate Valve, Stainless Steel
Ball Valve, Carbon Steel
Ball Valve, Stainless Steel
Temperature Measurement
Standard
Integral RTD – not available with Flanged model greater than class 600#
No Temperature Sensor
Expanded
Remote Thermowell and RTD
Standard
★
★
Transmitter Connection Platform
Standard
Expanded
104
Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve Manifold– not available with Flanged model greater than class 600
Direct -mount, 5-valve Manifold – not available with Flanged model greater than class 600
Remote-mount NPT Connections (1/2-in. NPT)
Standard
★
★
★
Direct-mount, high temperature 5-valve Manifold – not available with Flanged model greater than class
600
Remote-mount SW Connections (1/2-in.)
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Differential Pressure Range
Standard
Standard
★
★
★
0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar)
0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar)
0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar)
Transmitter Output
Standard
W(2)
Expanded
Low-Power, 1-5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
Transmitter Housing Material
Standard
Expanded
Standard
★
★
★
★
4–20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol
FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol
Profibus PA Protocol
Wireless
Conduit Entry Size
Aluminum
Aluminum
SST
SST
Engineered Polymer
Aluminum
SST
G1/2
G1/2
/2-14 NPT
M20 x 1.5
/2-14 NPT
M20 x 1.5
N/A
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
Transmitter Performance Class
Standard
1.6% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-yr. stability
A.6.4
Options (Include with selected model number)
Pressure Testing
Expanded
P1(3)
Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate
PX(3)
Extended Hydrostatic Testing
Special Cleaning
Expanded
P2
Cleaning for Special Services
PA
Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)
Material Testing
Expanded
V1
Dye Penetrant Exam
Material Examination
Expanded
V2
Radiographic Examination
Flow Calibration
Expanded
W1
Flow Calibration (Average K)
Special Inspection
Standard
QC1
Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate
QC7
Inspection & Performance Certificate
Specifications and Reference Data
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
105
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Surface Finish
Standard
RL
Surface finish for Low Pipe Reynolds # in Gas & Steam
RH
Surface finish for High Pipe Reynolds # in Liquid
Material Traceability Certification
Standard
Q8(4)
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10474:2004 3.1
Code Conformance(5)
Expanded
J2
ANSI/ASME B31.1
J3
ANSI/ASME B31.3
Materials Conformance
Expanded
J5(6)
NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156
Country Certification
Standard
J6
European Pressure Directive (PED)
Expanded
J1
Canadian Registration
Installed in Flanged Pipe Spool Section
Expanded
H3
150# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and Schedule
H4
300# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and Schedule
H5
600# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and Schedule
Instrument Connections for Remote Mount Options
Standard
G2
Needle Valves, Stainless Steel
G6
OS&Y Gate Valve, Stainless Steel
Expanded
G1
Needle Valves, Carbon Steel
G3
Needle Valves, Alloy C-276
G5
OS&Y Gate Valve, Carbon Steel
G7
OS&Y Gate Valve, Alloy C-276
Special Shipment
Standard
Y1
Mounting Hardware Shipped Separately
Special Dimensions
Expanded
VM
Variable Mounting
VT
Variable Tip
VS
Variable length Spool Section
PlantWeb Control Functionality
Standard
A01(7)
FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite
PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality
Standard
D01(7)
FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostics Suite
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol
Standard
WA3
106
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART
Standard
★
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Antenna and SmartPower
Standard
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
Product Certifications
Standard
C6
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
E5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof
(8)
E7
IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof
E8
ATEX Flameproof, Dust
I1(8)
ATEX Intrinsic Safety
I5
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
IA
ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only
K5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5)
K6(8)
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6)
K8(8)
ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1)
KB
FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of K5 and
C6)
KD(8)
FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8)
N1(8)
ATEX Type n
Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring Options
Standard
L1
Inert Sensor Fill Fluid Note: Silicone fill fluid is standard.
L2
Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
LA
Inert Sensor Fill Fluid and Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
Shipboard Approvals
Standard
SBS
American Bureau of Shipping
Display and Interface Options
Standard
M4(9)
LCD Display with Local Operator Interface
M5
LCD Display
Transmitter Calibration Certification
Standard
Q4
Calibration Certificate for Transmitter
Quality Certification for Safety
Standard
QS(11)
Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data
Transient Protection
Standard
T1(10)
Transient terminal block
Manifold for Remote Mount Option
Standard
F2
3-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel
F6
5-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel
Expanded
F1
3-Valve Manifold, Carbon Steel
F3
3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276
F5
5-Valve Manifold, Carbon Steel
F7
5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276
Specifications and Reference Data
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Standard
★
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
107
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Lower Power Output
Standard
C2(11)
0.8-3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on Hart Protocol
Alarm Limit
Standard
C4(11)(12) NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, High Alarm
CN(11)(12) NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, Low Alarm
Hardware Adjustments
Standard
DZ
Digital Zero Sensor Trim Configuration Button
Ground Screw
Standard
V5(13)
External Ground Screw Assembly
Typical Model
Number: 2051CFA
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
108
060
T1
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Available in remote mount applications only.
Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration.
Applies to assembled flowmeter only, mounting not tested.
Instrument Connections for Remote Mount Options and Isolation Valves for Flo-tap Models are not included in the Material Traceability Certification.
Not available with Transmitter Connection Platform 6.
Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to
certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F.
Not available with Low Power code M.
Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.
The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product Certification code IA.
Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).
NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-9. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Product Description
2051CFC
Compact Flowmeter
Measurement Type
Standard
Differential Pressure
Standard
★
Primary Element Technology
Standard
Conditioning Orifice Plate
Orifice Plate
Standard
★
★
Material Type
Standard
316 SST
Standard
★
Line Size
Standard
005(1)
010(1)
015(1)
020
030
040
060
080
100
120
/2-in. (15 mm)
1-in. (25 mm)
11/2-in. (40 mm)
2-in. (50 mm)
3-in. (80 mm)
4-in. (100 mm)
6-in. (150 mm)
8-in. (200 mm)
10-in. (250 mm)
12-in. (300 mm)
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Primary Element Style
Standard
Square Edged
Standard
★
Primary Element Type
Standard
040
065(2)
0.40 Beta Ratio
0.65 Beta Ratio
Standard
★
★
Temperature Measurement
Standard
Expanded
No Temperature Sensor
Standard
★
Remote Thermowell and RTD
Transmitter Connection Platform
Standard
Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve Manifold
Remote-mount, 1/4-in. NPT Connections
Standard
★
★
Differential Pressure Range
Standard
0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar)
0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar)
0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar)
Specifications and Reference Data
Standard
★
★
★
109
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-9. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Transmitter Output
Standard
W(3)
Expanded
Low-Power, 1-5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
Transmitter Housing Material
Standard
Expanded
Standard
★
★
★
★
4–20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol
FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol
Profibus PA Protocol
Wireless
Conduit Entry Size
Aluminum
Aluminum
SST
SST
Engineered Polymer
Aluminum
SST
G1/2
G1/2
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
/2-14 NPT
M20 x 1.5
/2-14 NPT
M20 x 1.5
N/A
Transmitter Performance Class
Standard
A.6.5
Standard
★
Up to ±1.75% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-year stability
Options (Include with selected model number)
Installation Accessories
Standard
AB
ANSI Alignment Ring (150#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes)
AC
ANSI Alignment Ring (300#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes)
AD
ANSI Alignment Ring (600#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes)
DG
DIN Alignment Ring (PN16)
DH
DIN Alignment Ring (PN40)
DJ
DIN Alignment Ring (PN100)
Expanded
JB
JIS Alignment Ring (10K)
JR
JIS Alignment Ring (20K)
JS
JIS Alignment Ring (40K)
Remote Adapters
Standard
FE
Flange Adapters 316 SST (1/2-in NPT)
High Temperature Application
Expanded
HT
Graphite Valve Packing (Tmax = 850 °F)
Flow Calibration
Expanded
WC(4)
Flow Calibration Certification (3 point)
WD(4)
Discharge Coefficient Verification (full 10 point)
Pressure Testing
Expanded
P1
Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate
110
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
Standard
★
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-9. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Special Cleaning
Expanded
P2
Cleaning for Special Services
PA
Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)
Special Inspection
Standard
QC1
Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate
QC7
Inspection and Performance Certificate
Transmitter Calibration Certification
Standard
Q4
Calibration Certificate for Transmitter
Quality Certification for Safety
Standard
QS(5)
Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data
Material Traceability Certification
Standard
Q8
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1
Code Conformance
Expanded
J2
ANSI/ASME B31.1
J3
ANSI/ASME B31.3
J4
ANSI/ASME B31.8
Materials Conformance
Expanded
J5(6)
NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156
Country Certification
Expanded
J1
Canadian Registration
Product Certifications
Standard
C6
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
E5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof
E7(7)
IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof
E8
ATEX Flameproof, Dust
I1(7)
ATEX Intrinsic Safety
I5
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
IA
ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only
K5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5)
K6(7)
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6)
K8(7)
ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1)
KB
FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of K5 and
C6)
KD(7)
FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8)
N1(7)
ATEX Type n
Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring Options
Standard
L1
Inert Sensor Fill Fluid
L2
Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
LA
Inert Sensor Fill Fluid and Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
Specifications and Reference Data
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Standard
★
★
★
111
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-9. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Shipboard Approvals
Standard
SBS
American Bureau of Shipping
Display and Interface Options
Standard
M4(8)
LCD Display with Local Operator Interface
M5
LCD Display
Transient Protection
Standard
T1(9)
Transient terminal block
Manifold for Remote Mount Option
Standard
F2
3-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel
F6
5-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel
PlantWeb Control Functionality
Standard
A01(10)
FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite
PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality
Standard
D01(10)
FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostic Suite
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol
Standard
WA3
Standard
★
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART
Antenna and SmartPower
Standard
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
Low Power Output
Standard
C2(11)
0.8-3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on Hart Protocol
Alarm Limit
Standard
C4(11)(12)
NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, High Alarm
CN(11)(12)
NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, Low Alarm
Hardware Adjustments
Standard
DZ
Digital Zero Sensor Trim Configuration Button
Ground Screw
Standard
V5(13)
External Ground Screw Assembly
Typical Model Number:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
112
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
2051CFC D C S 060 N 065 0 3 2 A A 1 WC E5 M5
Not available for Primary Element Technology C.
For 2-in. (50 mm) line sizes the Primary Element Type is 0.6 for Primary Element Technology Code C.
Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration.
Not available with Primary Element Technology P.
Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).
Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to
certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
Not available with Low Power code M.
Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.
The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product Certification code IA.
Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F.
Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).
NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Product Description
2051CFP
Integral Orifice Flowmeter
Measurement Type
Standard
Differential Pressure
Standard
★
Body Material
Standard
316 SST
Standard
★
Line Size
Standard
005
010
015
/2-in. (15 mm)
1-in. (25 mm)
11/2-in. (40 mm)
Standard
★
★
★
Process Connection
Standard
T1
S1(1)
P1
P2
D1
D2
D3
W1
W3
W6
Expanded
A1
A3
A6
R1
R3
R6
NPT Female Body (Not Available with Remote Thermowell and RTD)
Socket Weld Body (Not Available with Remote Thermowell and RTD)
Pipe Ends: NPT Threaded
Pipe ends: Beveled
Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN16, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN40, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN100, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, weld-neck
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, weld-neck
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, weld-neck
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 150, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 300, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 600, slip-on
Orifice Plate Material
Standard
316 SST
Expanded
Alloy C-276
Alloy 400
Standard
★
Bore Size Option
Standard
0066
0109
0160
0196
0260
0340
0150
0.066-in. (1.68 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.109-in. (2.77 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.160-in. (4.06 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.196-in. (4.98 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.260-in. (6.60 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.340-in. (8.64 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.150-in. (3.81 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
Specifications and Reference Data
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
113
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
0250
0345
0500
0630
0800
0295
0376
0512
0748
1022
1184
Expanded
0010
0014
0020
0034
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
0.250-in. (6.35 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
0.345-in. (8.76 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
0.500-in. (12.70 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
0.630-in. (16.00 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
0.800-in. (20.32 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
0.295-in. (7.49 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
0.376-in. (9.55 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
0.512-in. (13.00 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
0.748-in. (19.00 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
1.022-in. (25.96 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
1.184-in. (30.07 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
0.010-in. (0.25 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.014-in. (0.36 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.020-in. (0.51 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.034-in. (0.86 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
Transmitter Connection Platform
Standard
D3
D5
R3
R5
Expanded
D4
D6
D7
R4
R6
Standard
★
★
★
★
Direct-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, SST
Direct-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, SST
Remote-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, SST
Remote-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, SST
Direct-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276
Direct-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276
Direct-mount, High Temperature, 5-Valve Manifold, SST
Remote-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276
Remote-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276
Differential Pressure Ranges
Standard
Standard
★
★
★
0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar)
0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar)
0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar)
Transmitter Output
Standard
W(2)
Expanded
Low-Power, 1-5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
Transmitter Housing Material
Standard
Expanded
114
Standard
★
★
★
★
4–20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol
FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol
Profibus PA Protocol
Wireless
Aluminum
Aluminum
SST
SST
Engineered Polymer
Conduit Entry Size
/2-14 NPT
M20 x 1.5
/2-14 NPT
M20 x 1.5
N/A
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Table A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Aluminum
SST
G1/2
G1/2
Transmitter Performance Class
Standard
up to ±1.75% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-year stability
A.6.6
Options (Include with selected model number)
Transmitter Body / Bolt Material
Expanded
GT
High Temperature (850 °F / 454 °C)
Temperature Sensor
Expanded
RT(3)
Thermowell and RTD
Optional Connection
Standard
G1
DIN 19213 Transmitter Connection
Pressure Testing
Expanded
P1(4)
Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate
Special Cleaning
Expanded
P2
Cleaning for Special Services
PA
Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)
Material Testing
Expanded
V1
Dye Penetrant Exam
Material Examination
Expanded
V2
Radiographic Examination
Flow Calibration
Expanded
WD(5)
Discharge Coefficient Verification
Special Inspection
Standard
QC1
Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate
QC7
Inspection and Performance Certificate
Material Traceability Certification
Standard
Q8
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1
Code Conformance
Expanded
J2(6)
ANSI/ASME B31.1
J3(6)
ANSI/ASME B31.3
J4(6)
ANSI/ASME B31.8
Materials Conformance
Expanded
J5(7)
NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156
Country Certification
Standard
J6
European Pressure Directive (PED)
Specifications and Reference Data
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
115
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Reference Data
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Table A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Expanded
J1
Canadian Registration
Transmitter Calibration Certification
Standard
Q4
Calibration Certificate for Transmitter
Quality Certification for Safety
Standard
QS(8)
Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data
Product Certifications
Standard
C6
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
E5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof
E7(9)
IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof
E8
ATEX Flameproof, Dust
I1(9)
ATEX Intrinsic Safety
I5
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
IA
ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only
K5
FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5)
K6(9)
CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6)
K8(9)
ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1)
KB
FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of K5 and
C6)
KD(9)
FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1 and E8)
N1(9)
ATEX Type n
Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring Options
Standard
L1
Inert Sensor Fill Fluid
L2
Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
LA
Inert Sensor Fill Fluid and Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
Shipboard Approvals
Standard
SBS
American Bureau of Shipping
Display and Interface Options
Standard
M4(10)
LCD Display with Local Operator Interface
M5
LCD Display
Transient Protection
Standard
T1(11)
Transient terminal block
PlantWeb Control Functionality
Standard
A01(12)
FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite
PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality
Standard
D01(12)
FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostic Suite
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Standard
★
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol
Standard
WA3
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART
Standard
★
Antenna and SmartPower
Standard
116
Standard
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Table A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
Lower Power Output
Standard
C2(13)
0.8-3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on Hart Protocol
Alarm Limit
Standard
C4(13)(14) NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, High Alarm
CN(13)(14) NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, Low Alarm
Hardware Adjustments
Standard
DZ
Digital Zero Sensor Trim Configuration Button
Ground Screw
Standard
V5(15)
External Ground Screw Assembly
Typical Model Number:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
2051CFP D S 010 W1 S 0500 D3 2 A A 1 E5 M5
To improve pipe perpendicularity for gasket sealing, socket diameter is smaller than standard pipe O.D.
Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration.
Thermowell Material is the same as the body material.
Does not apply to Process Connection codes T1 and S1.
Not available for bore sizes 0010, 0014, 0020, or 0034.
Not available with DIN Process Connection codes D1, D2, or D3.
Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to
certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).
Not available with Low Power code M.
Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.
The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product Certification code IA.
Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F.
Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).
NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.
Specifications and Reference Data
117
Appendix A: Reference Data
June 2012
118
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
Appendix B
Product Certifications
Wireless Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 119
B.1
Wireless Certifications
B.1.1
Approved manufacturing locations
Rosemount Inc. — Chanhassen, Minnesota USA
Fisher-Rosemount GmbH & Co. — Wessling, Germany
Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Private Limited — Singapore
Beijing Rosemount Far East Instrument Co., LTD — Beijing, China
B.1.2
European directive information
The EC declaration of conformity can be found on . The most recent revision can be found at
www.rosemount.com.
B.1.3
Telecommunication compliance
All wireless devices require certification to ensure that they adhere to regulations regarding the
use of the RF spectrum. Nearly every country requires this type of product certification.
Emerson is working with governmental agencies around the world to supply fully compliant
products and remove the risk of violating country directives or laws governing wireless device
usage.
B.1.4
FCC and IC
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
conditions: This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device
must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 20 cm from all persons.
B.1.5
Ordinary location certification for FM
As standard, the transmitter has been examined and tested to determine that the design meets
basic electrical, mechanical, and fire protection requirements by FM, a nationally recognized
testing laboratory (NRTL) as accredited by the Federal Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA).
Product Certifications
119
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Product Certifications
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
B.1.6
North American certifications
Factory Mutual (FM) approvals
I5
B.1.7
CSA - Canadian Standards Association
I6
B.1.8
FM Intrinsically Safe, Non-Incendive, and Dust Ignition-proof.
Intrinsically Safe for Class I/II/III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G.
Zone Marking: Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia llC
Temperature Codes T4 (Tamb = -50 to 70 °C)
Non-Incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D.
Dust Ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G.
Ambient temperature limits: -50 to 85 °C
For use with Rosemount power module P/N 00753-9220-0001 only.
Enclosure Type 4X / IP66/68
CSA Intrinsically Safe
Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D.
Temp Code T3C
Enclosure Type 4X / IP66/68
For use with Rosemount power module P/N 00753-9220-0001 only.
European certifications
I1
ATEX Intrinsic Safety
Certificate No.: BAS01ATEX1303X
II 1G
Ex ia IIC T4 (Ta = -60 °C to 70 °C)
For use with Rosemount power module options 00753-9220-0001 only.
IP66/68
1180
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X)
The surface resistivity of the antenna is greater than one gigaohm. To avoid electrostatic charge
build-up, it must not be rubbed or cleaned with solvents or a dry cloth.
I7
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
Certificate No.: IECEx BAS 04.0017X
Ex ia IIC T4 (Ta = -60 °C to 70 °C)
For use with Rosemount power module options 00753-9220-0001 only.
IP66/68
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X)
The surface resistivity of the antenna is greater than one gigaohm. To avoid electrostatic charge
build-up, it must not be rubbed or cleaned with solvents or a dry cloth.
120
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Product Certifications
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
B.1.9
Japanese Certifications
I4
B.1.10
June 2012
TIIS Intrinsic Safety
Ex ia IIC T4
Certificate
Description
TC18649
2051_CD/CG/LD/LG
TC18650
2051_CA/TA/TG/LA
TC18657
2051FA/SFC/SFP
China (NEPSI) Certifications
I3
China Intrinsic Safety
Certificate No. (manufactured in Chanhassen, MN): GYJ081078
Certificate No. (manufactured in Beijing, China): GYJ06367
Certificate No. (manufactured in Singapore): GYJ06365
Ex ia IIC T4
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X)
See appropriate certificate.
Product Certifications
121
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
122
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4102, Rev AA
June 2012
Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale can be found at www.rosemount.com/terms_of_sale
The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co.
Rosemount. the Rosemount logotype, and SMART FAMILY are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc.
Coplanar is a trademark of Rosemount Inc.
Halocarbon is a trademark of the Halocarbon Products Corporation.o.
Fluorinert is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company Corporation
Syltherm 800 and D.C. 200 are registered trademarks of Dow Corning Corporation.
Neobee M-20 is a registered trademark of PVO International, Inc.
HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation.
Foundation fieldbus is a registered trademark of the Fieldbus Foundation.
All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
© June 2012 Rosemount, Inc. All rights reserved.
Emerson Process Management
Rosemount Measurement
8200 Market Boulevard
Chanhassen MN 55317 USA
Tel (USA) 1 800 999 9307
Tel (International) +1 952 906 8888
Fax +1 952 906 8889
Emerson Process Management
GmbH & Co.
Argelsrieder Feld 3
82234 Wessling
Germany
Tel 49 (8153) 9390
Fax 49 (8153) 939172
Emerson Process Management Asia
Pacific Private Limited
1 Pandan Crescent
Singapore 128461
T (65) 6777 8211
F (65) 6777 0947
Enquiries@AP.EmersonProcess.com
Beijing Rosemount Far East
Instrument Co., Limited
No. 6 North Street,
Hepingli, Dong Cheng District
Beijing 100013, China
T (86) (10) 6428 2233
F (86) (10) 6422 8586
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Rosemount 3051 Wireless Series
Pressure, Level, and Flow Solutions with WirelessHART™
Protocol
Title Page
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Rosemount 3051 Wireless Series Scalable Pressure,
Flow, and Level Solutions
Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for
optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents before
installing, using, or maintaining this product.
For technical assistance, contacts are listed below:
Customer Central
Technical support, quoting, and order-related questions.
United States - 1-800-999-9307 (7:00 am to 7:00 pm CST)
Asia Pacific- 65 777 8211
Europe/ Middle East/ Africa - 49 (8153) 9390
North American Response Center
Equipment service needs.
1-800-654-7768 (24 hours—includes Canada)
Outside of these areas, contact your local Emerson Process Management representative.
The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified
applications. Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require
nuclear-qualified hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings.
For information on Emerson Process Management nuclear-qualified products, contact your
local Rosemount Sales Representative.
Reference Manual
Title Page
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Explosions could result in death or serious injury:
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the
appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review
the approvals section of the 3051 reference manual for any restrictions associated with a
safe installation.
Before connecting a HART-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make
sure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or
non-incendive field wiring practices.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
conditions.
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 8 in. (20
cm) from all persons.
The Power Module may be replaced in a hazardous area. The Power Module has surface
resistivity greater than one gigaohm and must be properly installed in the wireless device
enclosure. Care must be taken during transportation to and from the point of installation to
prevent a potential electrostatic charging hazard.
Polymer enclosure has surface resistivity greater than one gigaohm. Care must be taken
during transportation to and from the point of installation to prevent a potential
electrostatic charging hazard.
Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.
To avoid process leaks, only use the o-ring designed to seal with the corresponding
flange adapter.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and the terminals. High voltage that may be present on
leads can cause electrical shock.
The Rosemount 3051 and all other wireless devices should be installed only after the Smart
Wireless Gateway has been installed and is functioning properly. Wireless devices should
also be powered up in order of proximity from the Smart Wireless Gateway, beginning with
the closest. This will result in a simpler and faster network installation.
ii
Reference Manual
Title Page
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Shipping considerations for wireless products (Lithium Batteries: Green Power Module,
model number 701PGNKF):
The unit was shipped to you without the Power Module installed. Please remove the
Power Module from the unit prior to shipping.
Each power module contains one “D” size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery.
Primary lithium batteries are regulated in transportation by the U.S. Department of
Transportation, and are also covered by IATA (International Air Transport Association),
ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization), and ARD (European Ground
Transportation of Dangerous Goods). It is the responsibility of the shipper to ensure
compliance with these or any other local requirements. Please consult current
regulations and requirements before shipping.
The power module with the wireless unit contains one “D” size primary lithium/thionyl
chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each battery contains
approximately 5.0 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the battery materials are
self-contained and are not reactive as long as the battery and the pack integrity are
maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical damage.
Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge.
Battery hazards remain when cells are discharged.
Power modules should be stored in a clean and dry area. For maximum battery life, storage
temperature should not exceed 30 °C (86 °F).
The Power Module may be replaced in a hazardous area. The Power Module has surface
resistivity greater than one gigaohm and must be properly installed in the wireless device
enclosure. Care must be taken during transportation to and from the point of installation to
prevent electrostatic charge build-up.
Using the Rosmeount 3051 Wireless Pressure Transmitter in a manner other than what is
specified by the menufacturer may impair the protection provided by the equipment.
iii
Title Page
June 2012
iv
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Contents
1Section 1: Introduction
1.1 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Models Covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2.1 Rosemount 3051CD Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2.2 Rosemount 3051CG Gage Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2.3 Rosemount 3051CA Absolute Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2.4 Rosemount 3051T Gage and Absolute Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.5 Rosemount 3051L Liquid Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 WirelessHART installation flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.4 Transmitter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.5 Considerations before transmitter installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.5.1 Wireless considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.5.2 Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.5.3 Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.5.4 Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.6 Service support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.7 Product Recycling/Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2Section 2: Configuration
2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
2.3 Required Bench Top Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
2.3.1 Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
2.4 Device Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2.4.1 Join Device to Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2.4.2 Configure Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
2.4.3 Remove Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
2.5 Review Configuration Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
2.5.1 Review Pressure Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
2.5.2 Review Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
2.5.3 Review Sensor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
2.5.4 Review Radio Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
2.6 Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
2.7 Check Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
2.7.1 Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.8 Basic Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.8.1 Set Process Variable Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.8.2 Set Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.8.3 Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.8.4 Write Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.9 LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.9.1 LCD Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.10Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.10.1Configure Process Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.10.2Sensor Temperature Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.11Diagnostics and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.11.1Master Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.11.2Join Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.11.3Number of Available Neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.12Advanced Functions for HART Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.12.1Saving, Recalling, and Cloning Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3Section 3: Installation
3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.2 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.2.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.3 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3.2 Wireless. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3.3 Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3.4 Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.4 Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.4.1 Mount the Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.4.2 Process Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.4.3 Consider Housing Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.4.4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.4.5 Power Module Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.4.6 Installing the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.5 Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.5.1 Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.5.2 Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.5.3 Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . 40
3.5.4 Manifold Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
vi
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
4Section 4: Commissioning
4.1 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
4.1.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
4.2 Network Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
4.3 Verify Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
5Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
5.2 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
5.2.1 Sensor Trim Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
5.2.2 Zero Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
5.2.3 Sensor Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
5.2.4 Recall Factory Trim—Sensor Trim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
5.2.5 Line Pressure Effect (Range 2 and Range 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
5.2.6 Compensating for Line Pressure (Range 4 and Range 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
5.3 LCD Screen Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
5.3.1 Startup Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
5.3.2 Diagnostic Button Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
5.3.3 Network Diagnostic Status Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
5.3.4 Device Diagnostic Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
6Section 6: Troubleshooting
6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
6.2 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
6.2.1 Warnings (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
6.3 Disassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
6.3.1 Removing from Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
6.3.2 Removing the electronics board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
6.3.3 Removing the sensor from the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
6.4 Reassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
6.5 Reassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
6.5.1 Attaching electronics board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
6.5.2 Reassembling the 3051C process flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
6.5.3 Installing drain/vent valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Table of Contents
vii
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
AAppendix A: Specifications and
Reference Data
A.1 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
A.1.1 Conformance to specification (±3s (Sigma)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
A.1.2 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
A.1.3 Reference Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
A.1.4 Flow performance - flow reference accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
A.1.5 Total Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
A.1.6 Long Term Stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
A.1.7 Dynamic Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
A.1.8 Line Pressure Effect per 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
A.1.9 Ambient Temperature Effect per 50°F (28°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
A.1.10Mounting Position Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
A.1.11Vibration Effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
A.1.12Power Supply Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
A.1.13Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
A.2 Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
A.2.1 Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
A.2.2 Range and Sensor Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
A.2.3 Zero and Span Adjustment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
A.3 Wireless Self-Organizing Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
A.3.1 Overpressure Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
A.3.2 Static Pressure Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
A.3.3 Burst Pressure Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
A.3.4 Temperature limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
A.3.5 Humidity Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
A.3.6 Volumetric Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
A.3.7 Damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
A.4 Physical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
A.4.1 Process Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
A.4.2 Process-Wetted Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
A.4.3 Rosemount 3051L process wetted parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
A.4.4 Non-Wetted Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
A.4.5 Shipping Weights for 3051 Wireless Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . .91
A.5 Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
A.5.1 Ordering Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
A.5.2 Rosemount 3051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
viii
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
Table of Contents
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
A.5.3 Rosemount 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
A.5.4 Rosemount 3051CF Flowmeter Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
A.5.5 Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
A.6 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
A.7 Spare parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
BAppendix B: Product Certifications
B.1 Wireless Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
B.1.1 Approved manufacturing locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
B.1.2 European directive information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
B.1.3 Telecommunication compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
B.1.4 FCC and IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
B.1.5 Ordinary location certification for FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
B.1.6 North American certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
B.1.7 CSA - Canadian Standards Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
B.1.8 European certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
B.1.9 Japanese Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
B.1.10China (NEPSI) Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Table of Contents
ix
Table of Contents
June 2012
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
Section 1: Introduction
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Section 1
June 2012
Introduction
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Models Covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Service support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
Product Recycling/Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
1.1
Using This Manual
The sections in this manual provide information on installing, operating, and maintaining the
Rosemount 3051 Wireless pressure transmitter with WirelessHART™ protocol. The sections are
organized as follows:
1.2
Section 2: Configuration provides instruction on commissioning and operating 3051
Wireless transmitters. Information on software functions, configuration parameters,
and online variables is also included.
Section 3: Installation contains mechanical and electrical installation instructions.
Section 4: Commissioning contains techniques for properly commissioning the device.
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance contains operation and maintenance
techniques.
Section 6: Troubleshooting provides troubleshooting techniques for the most common
operating problems.
Section A: Specifications and Reference Data supplies reference and specification data,
as well as ordering information.
Section B: Product Certifications contains approval information.
Models Covered
The following Rosemount 3051 Pressure Transmitters are covered by this manual:
1.2.1
Rosemount 3051CD Differential Pressure Transmitter
Measures differential pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar).
1.2.2
Rosemount 3051CG Gage Pressure Transmitter
Measures gage pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar).
1.2.3
Rosemount 3051CA Absolute Pressure Transmitter
Measures absolute pressure up to 4000 psia (275,8 bar).
Introduction
Section 1: Introduction
1.2.4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Rosemount 3051T Gage and Absolute Pressure Transmitter
Measures gage pressure up to 10000 psi (689,5 bar).
1.2.5
Rosemount 3051L Liquid Level Transmitter
Provides precise level and specific gravity measurements up to 300 psi (20,7 bar) for a wide
variety of tank configurations.
Introduction
Reference Manual
Section 1: Introduction
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
1.3
June 2012
WirelessHART installation flowchart
Figure 1-1. WirelessHART installation flowchart
START HERE
Configure
Network ID
Configure Join
Key
Configure
Update Rate
Bench
Calibration?
Field Install
No
Yes
Configure for
Pressure
Configure for
Level
Mount
Transmitter
(page 48)
Configure for
Flow
Verify
Check Process
Connection
(page 56)
Set Units
(page 21)
Configure
Scaled Variable
(page 31)
Configure
Scaled Variable
(page 31)
Set Range
Points
(page 23)
Set Scaled
Variable to PV
(page 31)
Set Scaled
Variable to PV
(page 34)
Review
Transmitter
Configuration
(page 20)
Install Power
Module
(page 71)
Apply Pressure
Select Linear
Output
(page 22)
Confirm
Transmitter
Configuration
(page 20)
Within
Specifications?
Set Damping
(page 27)
Yes
Trim the
Transmitter
(page 82)
No
Refer to
Section 5:
Operation and
Maintenance
Introduction
Done
Reference Manual
Section 1: Introduction
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
1.4
Transmitter overview
The Rosemount 3051C Coplanar design is offered for Differential Pressure (DP), Gage Pressure
(GP) and Absolute Pressure (AP) measurements. The Rosemount 3051C utilizes capacitance
sensor technology for DP and GP measurements. The Rosemount 3051T and 3051CA utilize
piezoresistive sensor technology for AP and GP measurements.
The major components of the Rosemount 3051 Wireless transmitter are the sensor module and
the electronics housing. The sensor module contains the oil filled sensor system (isolating
diaphragms, oil fill system, and sensor) and the sensor electronics. The sensor electronics are
installed within the sensor module and include a temperature sensor, a memory module, and
the analog to digital signal converter (A/D converter). The electrical signals from the sensor
module are transmitted to the output electronics in the electronics housing. The electronics
housing contains the output electronics board, the wireless antenna, and the battery. The basic
block diagram of the Rosemount 3051CD Wireless device is illustrated in Figure X-X on page X.
For the Rosemount 3051, pressure is applied to the isolating diaphragm(s). The oil deflects the
sensor which then changes its capacitance or voltage signal. This signal is then changed to a
digital signal by the Signal Processing. The microprocessor then takes the signals from the
Signal Processing and calculates the correct output of the transmitter. This signal is then sent via
wireless communication to the Gateway.
An optional LCD can be ordered that connects directly to the interface board which maintains
direct access to the signal terminals. The display indicates output and abbreviated diagnostic
messages. A glass display cover is provided. For WirelessHART output, the LCD Display features a
two-line display. The first line displays the actual measured value, the second line of six
characters displays the engineering units. The LCD can also display diagnostics messages.
Note
LCD Display utilizes a 5x6 character display and can display output and diagnostic messages. See
Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2. LCD/LOI Display
LCD Display
Introduction
Reference Manual
Section 1: Introduction
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Figure 1-3. Block diagram of operation
Signal Processing
Microprocessor
Temp.
Sensor
Sensor Module
Memory
Sensor linearization
Rerange
Damping
Diagnostics
Engineering units
Communication
Digital-toAnalog Signal
Conversion
WirelessHART
Communication
Memory
Configuration
A. Sensor Module
B. Electronics Board
C. WirelessHART Signal to Control System
D. Field Communicator
1.5
Considerations before transmitter installation
1.5.1
Wireless considerations
Power up sequence
The Smart Wireless Gateway (Gateway) should be installed and functioning properly before any
wireless devices are powered. Install the power module, SmartPower Solutions, model number
701PGNKF green power module, into the 3051 to power the device. This results in a simpler and
faster network installation. Enabling Active Advertising on the Gateway ensures that new
devices are able to join the network faster. For more information see the Smart Wireless
Gateway Reference Manual (Document No. 00809-0200-4420).
Antenna position
The antenna is internal to the pressure transmitter. To achieve optimal range, orient the
transmitter with the sensor horizontal and the power module closest to the ground as shown in
Figure X-X. Good connectivity can also be achieved in other orientations. The antenna should
Introduction
Section 1: Introduction
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
also be approximately 1 m (3 ft.) from any large structure, building, or conductive surface to
allow for clear communication to other devices. Refer to best practices for additional
information on optimal mounting locations of device.
Recommended practices
When mounting the device, recommended practices should be considered to achieve the best
wireless performance. See Appendix X for more information on recommended practices.
1.5.2
Mechanical
Location
When choosing an installation location and position, take into account access to the power
module compartment for easy power module replacement
Electronics Cover
The electronics cover is tightened so that polymer contacts polymer. When removing the
electronics cover, ensure that there is no damage done to the o-ring. If damaged replace before
reattaching cover, ensuring polymer contacts polymer.
1.5.3
Electrical
Power Module
The Rosemount 3051 Wireless Pressure Transmitter is self-powered. The power module
contains one "D" size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power Module, model
number 701PGNKF). Each battery contains approximately 5.0 grams of lithium. Under normal
conditions, the battery materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the battery
and the power module are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical, or
mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge.
Use caution when handling the power module, it may be damaged if dropped from heights in
excess of 6.10 m (20 ft).
1.5.4
Environmental
Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the appropriate
hazardous locations certifications.
Temperature Effects
The transmitter will operate within specifications for ambient temperatures between -40 and 85
°C (-40 and 185 °F).
Heat from the process is transferred to the transmitter housing. If the process temperature is
high, the ambient temperature will need to be lower to account for heat transferred to the
transmitter housing. See Table 1-1 on page 1-7 for process temperature derating.
Introduction
Reference Manual
Section 1: Introduction
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 1-1. Temperature Derating
1.6
Process Temperature
(°C)
Process
Temperature (°F)
Max Ambient Max Ambient
(°C)
(°F)
260
500
41
105.8
240
464
45
113
220
428
49
120.2
200
392
53
127.4
180
356
57
134.6
160
320
61
141.8
140
284
64
147.2
120
248
68
154.4
100
212
72
161.6
85
185
75
167
Service support
Within the United States, call the Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valve
Response Center using the 1-800-654-RSMT (7768) toll-free number. This center, available 24
hours a day, will assist you with any needed information or materials.
The center will ask for product model and serial numbers, and will provide a Return Material
Authorization (RMA) number. The center will also ask for the process material to which the
product was last exposed.
For inquiries outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson Process Management
representative for RMA instructions.
To expedite the return process outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson
Process Management representative.
Individuals who handle products exposed to a hazardous substance can avoid injury if they
are informed of and understand the hazard. The product being returned will require a copy
of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each substance must be included
with the returned goods.
Introduction
Section 1: Introduction
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Shipping considerations for wireless products (Lithium Batteries: Green Power Module,
model number 701PGNKF):
The unit was shipped to you without the Power Module installed. Please remove the Power
Module from the unit prior to shipping.
Each power module contains one “D” size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery. Primary
lithium batteries are regulated in transportation by the U.S. Department of Transportation,
and are also covered by IATA (International Air Transport Association), ICAO (International
Civil Aviation Organization), and ARD (European Ground Transportation of Dangerous
Goods). It is the responsibility of the shipper to ensure compliance with these or any other
local requirements. Please consult current regulations and requirements before shipping.
The Power Module contains one “D” size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power
Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each Power Module contains approximately 5 grams of
lithium. Under normal conditions, the Power Module materials are self-contained and are not
reactive as long as the batteries and the module integrity are maintained. Care should be taken
to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent
premature discharge. Power Module hazards remain when cells are discharged.
Power Module should be stored in a clean and dry area. For maximum battery life, storage
temperature should not exceed 30° C.
Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valve Response Center representatives will
explain the additional information and procedures necessary to return goods exposed to
hazardous substances.
1.7
Product Recycling/Disposal
Recycling of equipment and packaging should be taken into consideration and disposed of in
accordance with local and national legislation/regulations.
Introduction
Section 2: Configuration
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Section 2
Configuration
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Required Bench Top Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
Device Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11
Review Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13
Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16
Check Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17
Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 21
Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 22
Diagnostics and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 23
Advanced Functions for HART Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 25
2.1
Overview
This section contains information on configuration and verification that should be performed
prior to installation.
Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For
convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled “Fast Keys” for each software
function below the appropriate headings.
Example software function
Fast Keys
2.2
1, 2, 3, etc.
Safety Messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing
an operation preceded by this symbol.
Configuration
Section 2: Configuration
2.2.1
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Warnings ( )
Explosions can result in death or serious injury.
Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the
instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or nonincendive field
wiring practices.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
conditions: This device may not cause harmful interference this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 20cm
from all persons.
2.3
Required Bench Top Configuration
Bench top configuration requires a Field Communicator, AMS, or any WirelessHART
Communicator. Connect the Field Communicator leads to the terminals labeled “COMM” on the
terminal block. See Figure 2-1 on page 11.
Bench top configuration consists of testing the transmitter and verifying transmitter
configuration data. 3051 Wireless transmitters must be configured before installation.
Configuring the transmitter on the bench before installation using a Field Communicator, AMS,
or any WirelessHART Communicator ensures that all network settings are working correctly.
When using a Field Communicator, any configuration changes made must be sent to the
transmitter by using the “Send” key (F2). AMS configuration changes are implemented when
the “Apply” button is clicked.
AMS Wireless Configurator
AMS is capable of connecting to devices either directly, using a HART modem, or wirelessly via
the Smart Wireless Gateway. When configuring the device, double click the device icon or right
click and select Configure.
2.3.1
Connection Diagrams
Bench Hook-up
Connect the bench equipment as shown in Figure 2-1 on page 11, and turn on the Field
Communicator by pressing the ON/OFF key or log into AMS. The Field Communicator or AMS
will search for a HART-compatible device and indicate when the connection is made. If the Field
Communicator or AMS fail to connect, it indicates that no device was found. If this occurs, refer
to Section 6: Troubleshooting.
10
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Field Hook-up
Figure 2-1 on page 11 illustrates the wiring for a field hook-up with a Field Communicator or
AMS. The Field Communicator or AMS may be connected at “COMM” on the transmitter
terminal block.
Figure 2-1. Field Communicator Connection
For HART communication, a 3051 WirelessHART DD is required.
2.4
Device Network Configuration
2.4.1
Join Device to Network
Fast Keys
2, 1, 1
In order to communicate with the Smart Wireless Gateway, and ultimately the Host System, the
transmitter must be configured to communicate over the wireless network. This step is the
wireless equivalent of connecting wires from a transmitter to the host system.
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 1: Guided Setup.
3.
Select 1: Join Device to Network.
Using a Field Communicator or AMS, enter the Network ID and Join Key so that they match the
Network ID and Join Key of the Smart Wireless Gateway and other devices in the network. If the
Network ID and Join Key are not identical to those set in the Gateway, the transmitter will not
communicate with the network. The Network ID and Join Key may be obtained from the Smart
Wireless Gateway on the Setup>Network>Settings page on the web server.
Configuration
11
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
2.4.2
Configure Update Rate
Fast Keys
2, 1, 2
The Update Rate is the frequency at which a new measurement is taken and transmitted over
the wireless network. This by default is 1 minute. This may be changed at commissioning, or at
any time via AMS Wireless Configurator. The Update Rate is user selectable from 8 seconds to 60
minutes.
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 1: Guided Setup.
3.
Select 2: Configure Update Rate.
When device configuration is completed, remove the Power Module and replace the housing
cover. Tighten the cover so that metal contacts metal.
2.4.3
Remove Power Module
After the sensor and network have been configured, remove the Power Module and replace the
housing cover. The Power Module should be inserted only when the device is ready to be
commissioned.
Use caution when handling the Power Module. The Power Module may be damaged if dropped
from heights in excess of 20 ft.
12
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
2.5
June 2012
Review Configuration Data
The following is a list of factory default configurations that can be viewed by using the Field
Communicator or AMS. Follow the steps below to review the transmitter configuration
information.
Note
Information and procedures in this section that make use of Field Communicator fast key
sequences and AMS assume that the transmitter and communication equipment are
connected, powered, and operating correctly.
2.5.1
Review Pressure Information
Fast Keys
2, 2, 2
To view pressure information:
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 2: Pressure.
4.
Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
2.5.2
Unit
Transfer Function
Damping
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value
Maximum
Minimum
Minimum Span
Review Device Information
Fast Keys
2, 2, 4, 3
To view device information:
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 4: Device Information.
4.
Select 3: Device.
5.
Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
Configuration
Manufacturer
Model
13
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
14
Final Assembly Number
Universal
Field Device
Software
Hardware
Descriptor
Message
Date
Model Number I
Model Number II
Model Number III
SI Unit Restriction
Country
Device ID
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
2.5.3
June 2012
Review Sensor Information
Fast Keys
2, 2, 4, 4
To view sensor information:
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 4: Device Information.
4.
Select 4: Sensor.
5.
Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
Measurement Type
Module Type
Module Serial Number
Sensor Materials
Process Connector
Connector Type
Connector Material
O Ring Material
Drain Vent Material
Remote Seal
2.5.4
Isolator Material
Fill Fluid
Number of Seals
Seal Type
Diaphragm Material
Seal Fill Fluid
Review Radio Information
Fast Keys
2, 2, 4, 5
To view radio information:
Configuration
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 4: Device Information.
4.
Select 5: Radio.
5.
Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
Manufacturer
Device Type
Device Revision
Software Revision
Hardware Revision
15
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
2.6
1. Overview
2. Configure
3. Service Tools
Field Communicator
1. Active Alerts
2. Communication Status
3. Pressure
4. Pressure Status
5. Last Update Time
1. Guided Setup
2. Manual Setup
3. Alert Setup
1. HI-HI Alarm
2. HI Alarm
3. LO Alarm
4. LO-LO Alarm
1. Join Device to Network
2. Configure Update Rate
3. Zero Trim
4. Configure Device Display
5. Configure Process Alarms
6. Basic Setup
1. Wireless
2. Pressure
3. Device Temperatures
4. Device Information
5. Device Display
6. Other
1. Sensor Temperature
2. Electronics Temperature
1. Unit
2. Maximum
3. Minimum
1. Configure LO-LO Alarm
2. Mode
3. Variable
4. Alarm Direction
5. Alarm Limit
6. Dead Band
1. Configure HI-HI Alarm
2. Mode
3. Variable
4. Alarm Direction
5. Alarm Limit
6. Dead Band
1. Tag
2. Long Tag
3. Device
4. Sensor
5. Radio
6. Write Protect
1. Configure LO Alarm
2. Mode
3. Variable
4. Alarm Direction
5. Alarm Limit
6. Dead Band
1. Configure HI Alarm
2. Mode
3. Variable
4. Alarm Direction
5. Alarm Limit
6. Dead Band
1. Mode
2. Display Options
2. Variables
3. Communications
4. Routine Maintenance
5. Simulate
1. Measurement and
Status Log
1. Active Alerts
2. History
1. Alerts
1. Join Status
2. Communication Status
3. Join Mode
4. Number of Available
Neighbors
5. Number of Advertisements
Heard
6. Number of Join Attempts
1. Sensor Calibration
2. Other
1. Pressure
2. Sensor Temperature
3. Electronics Temperature
4. Supply Voltage
16
1. Network ID
2. Join Device to Network
3. Broadcast Rates
4. Configure Broadcast Power Level
5. Power Mode
6. Power Source
1. Percent of Range
2. Pressure
3. Pressure Status
4. Sensor Temperature
5. Sensor Temperature Status
6. Electronics Temperature
7. Electronics Temp Status
8. Supply Voltage
9. Supply Voltage Status
10. Last Update Time
1. Current Lower Trim
2. Current Upper Trim
3. Zero Sensor Trim
4. Lower Sensor Trim
5. Upper Sensor Trim
6. Recall Factory Trim
1. Master Reset
2. Measurement History
3. Advertise to New Devices
1. Configure Update Rate
2. Message 1
3. Message 2
1. Unit
2. Transfer Function
3. Damping
4. Upper Range Value
5. Lower Range Value
6. Maximum
7. Minimum
8. Minimum Span
9. Range Using Applied Value
1. Manufacturer
2. Model
3. Final Assembly Number
4. Universal
5. Field Device
6. Software
7. Hardware
8. Descriptor
9. Message
10. Date
11. Model Number I
12. Model Number II
13. Model Number III
14. SI Unit Restriction
15. Country
16. Device ID
1. Measurement Type
2. Module Type
3. Module Serial Number
4. Sensor Materials
5. Process Connector
6. Remote Seal
1. Number of Seals
2. Seal Type
3. Diaphragm Material
4. Seal Fill Fluid
1. Connector Type
2. Connector Material
3. O Ring Material
4. Drain Vent Material
1. Isolator Fluid
2. Fill Fluid
1. Manufacturer
2. Device Type
3. Device Revision
4. Software Revision
5. Hardware Revision
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
2.7
June 2012
Check Output
Before performing other transmitter operations, ensure that the transmitter is operating
properly by checking the operating parameters.
2.7.1
Operating Parameters
Fast Keys
3, 2
The pressure output value in both engineering units and percent of range will reflect the applied
pressure even when the applied pressure is outside of the configured range as long as the
applied pressure is between the upper and lower range limit of the transmitter. For example, if a
Range 2 3051T (LRL = 0 psi, URL = 150 psi) is ranged from 0 to 100 psi, an applied pressure of
150 psi will return a % of range output of 150% and an engineering output of 150 psi.
To view the Operating Parameters menu:
1.
From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.
2.
Select 2: Variables.
The Operating Parameters menu displays the following information pertaining to the device:
Percent of Range
Pressure
Pressure Status
Sensor Temperature
Sensor Temperature Status
Electronics Temperature
Electronics Temperature Status
Supply Voltage
Supply Voltage Status
Last Update Time
2.8
Basic Setup
2.8.1
Set Process Variable Unit
Fast Keys
2, 2, 2, 1
The PV Unit command sets the process variable units to allow you to monitor your process using
the appropriate units of measure.
To select a unit of measure for the PV:
Configuration
17
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 2: Pressure.
4.
Select 1: Unit to select from the following engineering units:
18
inH2O
inHg
ftH2O
mmH2O
mmHg
psi
bar
mbar
g/cm2
kg/cm2
Pa
kPa
torr
atm
MPa
inH2O at 4 °C
mmH2O at 4 °C
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
2.8.2
June 2012
Set Transfer Function
Fast Keys
2, 2, 2, 2
The 3051 Wireless has two output settings: Linear and Square Root. Activate the square root
output option to make output proportional to flow. As input approaches zero, the 3051
Wireless automatically switches to linear output in order to ensure a more smooth, stable
output near zero (see Figure 2-2).
From 0 to 0.6 percent of the ranged pressure input, the slope of the curve is unity (y = x). This
allows accurate calibration near zero. Greater slopes would cause large changes in output (for
small changes at input). From 0.6 percent to 0.8 percent, curve slope equals 42 (y = 42x) to
achieve continuous transition from linear to square root at the transition point.
To select the output transfer function:
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 2: Pressure.
4.
Select 2: Transfer Function and choose either Linear or Square Root.
Figure 2-2. Square Root Output Transition Point
Full Scale
Flow (%)
Sq. Root
Curve
Sq. Root Curve
Transition Point
Transition Point
Linear Section
Slope=42
Slope=1
Configuration
19
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
2.8.3
Damping
Fast Keys
2, 2, 2, 3
The Damping command introduces a delay in processing which increases the response time of
the transmitter; smoothing variations in output readings caused by rapid input changes. In the
3051 Wireless pressure transmitter, damping only takes effect when the device is placed in high
power refresh mode and during calibration. In normal power mode, the effective damping is 0.
Note that when the device is in high power refresh mode, battery power will be depleted rapidly.
Determine the appropriate damp setting based on the necessary response time, signal stability,
and other requirements of the loop dynamics of your system. The damping value of your device
is user selectable from 0 to 25.6 seconds.
To determine the current damping value:
2.8.4
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 2: Pressure.
4.
Select 3: Damping.
Write Protect
Fast Keys
2, 2, 4, 6
The 3051 Wireless has a software write protect security feature.
The view write protect security settings:
20
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 4: Device Information.
4.
Select 6: Write Protect.
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
2.9
LCD Display
2.9.1
LCD Display Configuration
Fast Keys
2, 1, 4
The LCD display indicates output and abbreviated diagnostic messages.
Note
Use Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002.
The LCD display features a four-line display and a bar graph. The first line of five characters
displays the output description, the second line of seven digits displays the actual value, the
third line of six characters displays engineering units and the fourth line displays “Error” when
the transmitter is in alarm. The LCD display can also display diagnostic messages. The bar graph
represents the network connectivity status.
See “LCD Screen Messages” on page 57 for more information on LCD messages.
To configure LCD display options:
Configuration
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 1: Guided Setup.
3.
Select 4: Configure Device Display.
21
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
2.10
Detailed Setup
2.10.1
Configure Process Alarms
Fast Keys
2, 1, 5
Alerts allow the user to configure the transmitter to output a HART message when the
configured data point is exceeded. A process alert will be transmitted continuously if the set
points are exceeded and the alert mode is ON. An alert will be displayed on a Field
Communicator, AMS status screen or in the error section of the LCD display. The alert will reset
once the value returns within range.
Note
HI alert value must be higher than the LO alert value. Both alert values must be within the
pressure or temperature sensor limits.
Units of Measurement
Example 1: Rising Alert
Alert “OFF”
Alert “ON”
Alert “OFF”
Alert Set Point
Deadband
Assigned Value
Time
Units of Measurement
Example 2: Falling Alert
Alert “OFF”
Alert “ON”
Alert “OFF”
Assigned Value
Alert Set Point
Deadband
Time
To configure the process alerts, perform the following procedure:
22
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 1: Guided Setup.
3.
Select 5: Configure Process Alarms and follow the on-screen instructions to complete
configure of process alarms.
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
2.10.2
June 2012
Sensor Temperature Unit
Fast Keys
2, 2, 3, 1, 1
The Sensor Temperature Unit command selects between Celsius and Fahrenheit units for the
sensor temperature. The sensor temperature output is accessible via HART only.
To select the sensor temperature unit:
2.11
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 2: Manual Setup.
3.
Select 3: Device Temperatures.
4.
Select 1: Sensor Temperature.
5.
Select 1: Unit to select from Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Diagnostics and Service
Diagnostics and service functions listed below are primarily for use after field installation. The
Transmitter Test feature is designed to verify that the transmitter is operating properly, and can
be performed either on the bench or in the field.
2.11.1
Master Reset
Fast Keys
3, 4, 2, 1
The master reset function will reset the device electronics. To perform a master reset:
2.11.2
1.
From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.
2.
Select 4: Routine Maintenance.
3.
Select 2: Other.
4.
Select 1: Master Reset.
Join Status
Fast Keys
3, 3, 1
To view the join status of the device, perform the following procedure:
Configuration
1.
From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.
2.
Select 3: Communications.
3.
Select 1: Join Status.
23
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Wireless devices join the secure network through a four step process:
2.11.3
Step 1. Network Found
Step 2. Network Security Clearance Granted
Step 3. Network Bandwidth Allocated
Step 4. Network Join Complete
Number of Available Neighbors
Fast Keys
3, 3, 4
In a self-organizing network, the more neighbors a device has, the more robust the network will
be. To view the number of available neighbors for the wireless device, perform the following
procedure:
24
1.
From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.
2.
Select 3: Routine Maintenance.
3.
Select 4: Number of Available Neighbors.
Configuration
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
2.12
Advanced Functions for HART Protocol
2.12.1
Saving, Recalling, and Cloning Configuration Data
Fast Keys
left arrow, 1, 2
Use the cloning feature of the Field Communicator or the AMS “User Configuration” feature to
configure several 3051 Wireless transmitters similarly. Cloning involves configuring a
transmitter, saving the configuration data, then sending a copy of the data to a separate
transmitter. Several possible procedures exist when saving, recalling, and cloning configuration
data. For complete instructions refer to the Field Communicator manual (publication no.
00809-0100-4276) or AMS Books Online. One common method is as follows:
Field Communicator
1.
Completely configure the first transmitter.
2.
Save the configuration data:
a.
Select F2 SAVE from the Field Communicator HOME/ONLINE screen.
b. Ensure that the location to which the data will be saved is set to MODULE. If it is not,
select 1: Location to set the save location to MODULE.
c.
Select 2: Name, to name the configuration data. The default is the transmitter tag
number.
d. Ensure that the data type is set to STANDARD. If the data type is NOT STANDARD,
select 3: Data Type to set the data type to STANDARD.
e.
Configuration
Select F2 SAVE.
3.
Connect and power the receiving transmitter and Field Communicator.
4.
Select the back arrow from the HOME/ONLINE screen. The Field Communicator menu
appears.
5.
Select 1: Offline, 2: Saved Configuration, 1: Module Contents to reach the MODULE
CONTENTS menu.
6.
Use the DOWN ARROW to scroll through the list of configurations in the memory
module, and use the RIGHT ARROW to select and retrieve the required configuration.
7.
Select 1: Edit.
8.
Select 1: Mark All.
9.
Select F2 SAVE.
10.
Use the DOWN ARROW to scroll through the list of configurations in the memory
module, and use the RIGHT ARROW to select the configuration again.
11.
Select 3: Send to download the configuration to the transmitter.
12.
Select OK after the control loop is set to manual.
13.
After the configuration has been sent, select OK.
25
Reference Manual
Section 2: Configuration
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
When finished, the Field Communicator informs you of the status. Repeat Steps 3 through 13 to
configure another transmitter.
Note
The transmitter receiving cloned data must have the same software version (or later) as the
original transmitter.
AMS creating a Reusable Copy
To create a reusable copy of a configuration perform the following procedure:
1.
Completely configure the first transmitter.
2.
Select View then User Configuration View from the menu bar (or click the toolbar
button).
3.
In the User Configuration window, right click and select New from the context menu.
4.
In the New window, select a device from the list of templates shown, and click OK.
5.
The template is copied into the User Configurations window, with the tag name
highlighted; rename it as appropriate and press Enter.
Note
A device icon can also be copied by dragging and dropping a device template or any other
device icon from AMS Explorer or Device Connection View into the User Configurations window.
The “Compare Configurations” window appears, showing the Current values of the copied
device on one side and mostly blank fields on the other (User Configuration) side.
6.
Transfer values from the current configuration to the user configuration as appropriate
or enter values by typing them into the available fields.
7.
Click Apply to apply the values, or click OK to apply the values and close the window.
AMS Applying a User Configuration
Any amount of user configurations can be created for the application. They can also be saved,
and applied to connected devices or to devices in the Device List or Plant Database.
To apply a user configuration perform the following procedure:
26
1.
Select the desired user configuration in the User Configurations window.
2.
Drag the icon onto a like device in AMS Explorer or Device Connection View. The
Compare Configurations window opens, showing the parameters of the target device
on one side and the parameters of the user configuration on the other.
3.
Transfer parameters from the user configuration to the target device as desired, Click
OK to apply the configuration and close the window.
Configuration
Section 3: Installation
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Section 3
Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 27
Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 27
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 29
Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 31
Installing the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 37
Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 38
3.1
Overview
The information in this section covers installation considerations. A Quick Installation Guide
(document number 00825-0100-4100) is shipped with every transmitter to describe basic
installation and startup procedures. Dimensional drawings for each Rosemount 3051 Wireless
variation and mounting configuration are included in Appendix A: Specifications and Reference
Data.
Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For
convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled “Fast Keys” for each software
function below the appropriate headings.
3.2
Safety Messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operation. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated with a warning symbol (
). Refer to the following safety messages before
performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
Installation
27
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
3.2.1
Warnings ( )
Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury.
Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.
Explosions can result in death or serious injury.
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the
appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review
the approvals section of the 3051 Wireless reference manual for any restrictions associated
with a safe installation.
Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the
instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field
wiring practices.
Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the
appropriate hazardous locations certifications.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage may be present on leads can
cause electrical shock.
Process leaks could result in death or serious injury.
Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.
Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is
in service.
Replacement equipment or spare parts not approved by Rosemount Inc. for use as spare
parts could reduce the pressure retaining capabilities of the transmitter and may render the
instrument dangerous.
Use only bolts supplied or sold by Rosemount Inc. as spare parts.
Improper assembly of manifolds to traditional flange can damage SuperModule™.
For safe assembly of manifold to traditional flange, bolts must break back plane of
flange web (i.e., bolt hold) but must not contact module housing.
The Power Module with the wireless unit contains one “D” size primary lithium/thionyl
chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each Power Module
contains approximately 5 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the Power Module
materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the batteries and the pack
integrity are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical
damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge.
28
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
3.3
Considerations
3.3.1
General
Section 3: Installation
June 2012
Measurement performance depends upon proper installation of the transmitter and impulse
piping. Mount the transmitter close to the process and use a minimum of piping to achieve best
performance. Also, consider the need for easy access, personnel safety, practical field
calibration, and a suitable transmitter environment. Install the transmitter to minimize
vibration, shock, and temperature fluctuation.
3.3.2
Wireless
Power Up Sequence
The Power Module should not be installed on any wireless device until the Smart Wireless
Gateway is installed and functioning properly. Wireless devices should also be powered up in
order of proximity from the Smart Wireless Gateway beginning with the closest. This will result
in a simpler and faster network installation. Enable High Speed Operation on the Gateway to
ensure that new devices join the network faster. For more information see the Smart Wireless
Gateway Manual (Doc. No. 00809-0200-4420).
Field Communicator Connections
In order for the Field Communicator to interface with the 3051, the Power Module must be
connected.
Figure 3-1. Field Communicator Connections
3.3.3
Mechanical
Note
For steam service or for applications with process temperatures greater than the limits of the
transmitter, do not blow down impulse piping through the transmitter. Flush lines with the
blocking valves closed and refill lines with water before resuming measurement.
Note
When the transmitter is mounted on its side, position the Coplanar flange to ensure proper
venting or draining. Mount the flange as shown in Figure 3.4.2 on page 34, keeping drain/vent
connections on the bottom for gas service and on the top for liquid service.
Installation
29
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
3.3.4
Environmental
Access requirements and cover installation on page 31 can help optimize transmitter
performance. Mount the transmitter to minimize ambient temperature changes, vibration,
mechanical shock, and to avoid external contact with corrosive materials. Appendix A:
Specifications and Reference Data lists temperature operating limits.
Figure 3-2. Installation Flowchart
START HERE
Bench
Calibration?
No
Field Install
Yes
Configure
(Section 2)
Set Units
Check Switches
(page 36)
Verify
Mount
Transmitter
(page 31)
Review
Transmitter
Configuration
(page 11)
Install Power
Module
(pages 37–36)
Check Process
Connection
(page 34)
Set Range
Points
Apply Pressure
Confirm
Transmitter
Configuration
(page 11)
Set Network
Parameters
Within
Specifications?
No
Refer to
Section 4
Operation and
Maintenance
30
Yes
Trim Transmitter
for Mounting
Effects
(page 52)
Done
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
3.4
June 2012
Installation Procedures
For dimensional drawing information refer to “Dimensional Drawings” on page 93.
Process Flange Orientation
Mount the process flanges with sufficient clearance for process connections. For safety reasons,
place the drain/vent valves so the process fluid is directed away from possible human contact
when the vents are used. In addition, consider the need for a testing or calibration input.
Housing Rotation
See “Consider Housing Rotation” on page 36.
Power Module Side of Electronics Housing
Mount the transmitter so the Power Module side is accessible. Clearance of 2.75-in. (70 mm) is
required for cover removal.
Circuit Side of Electronics Housing
Provide 0.75 in. (19 mm) of clearance for units with out an LCD display. Three inches of
clearance is required for cover removal if a meter is installed.
Cover Installation
Always ensure a proper seal by installing the electronics housing cover(s) so that polymer
contacts polymer. Use Rosemount O-rings.
3.4.1
Mount the Transmitter
Mounting Brackets
Facilitate mounting transmitter to a 2-in. pipe, or to a panel. The B4 Bracket (SST) option is
standard for use with the Coplanar and In-Line flanges. “Coplanar Flange Mounting Configurations” on page 93 shows bracket dimensions and mounting configurations for the B4 option.
Options B1–B3 and B7–B9 are sturdy, epoxy/polyester-painted brackets designed for use with
the traditional flange. The B1–B3 brackets have carbon steel bolts, while the B7–B9 brackets
have stainless steel bolts. The BA and BC brackets and bolts are stainless steel. The B1/B7/BA
and B3/B9/BC style brackets support 2-inch pipe-mount installations, and the B2/B8 style
brackets support panel mounting.
Note
Most transmitters are calibrated in the horizontal position. Mounting the transmitter in any
other position will shift the zero point to the equivalent amount of liquid head caused by the
varied mounting position. To reset zero point, refer to “Sensor Trim” on page 53.
Position the antenna such that it is vertical, typically straight up (antenna may be pointed down
as well.)
Installation
31
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Flange Bolts
The 3051 can be shipped with a Coplanar flange or a Traditional flange installed with four
1.75-inch flange bolts. Mounting bolts and bolting configurations for the Coplanar and
Traditional flanges can be found on page 2-6, 7. Stainless steel bolts supplied by Emerson
Process Management are coated with a lubricant to ease installation. Carbon steel bolts do not
require lubrication. No additional lubricant should be applied when installing either type of bolt.
Bolts supplied by Emerson Process Management are identified by their head markings:
B7M
Carbon Steel (CS) Head Markings
Stainless Steel (SST) Head Markings
660
CL A
316
B8M
KM
Alloy K-500 Head Marking
F593_
* The last digit in the F593_ head marking may
be any letter between A and M.
Bolt Installation
Only use bolts supplied with the Rosemount 3051 or sold by Emerson Process Management as
spare parts. When installing the transmitter to one of the optional mounting brackets, torque
the bolts to 125 in-lb. (0,9 N-m). Use the following bolt installation procedure:
1.
Finger-tighten the bolts.
2.
Torque the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossing pattern.
3.
Torque the bolts to the final torque value using the same crossing pattern.
Torque values for the flange and manifold adapter bolts are as follows:
Table 3-1. Bolt Installation
Torque Values
32
Bolt Material
Initial Torque Value
Final Torque Value
CS-ASTM-A445 Standard
316 SST—Option L4
ASTM-A-193-B7M—Option L5
Alloy K-500—Option L6
ASTM-A-453-660—Option L7
ASTM-A-193-B8M—Option L8
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
150 in.-lb (17 N-m)
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
150 in.-lb (17 N-m)
150 in.-lb (17 N-m)
650 in.-lb (73 N-m)
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
650 in.-lb (73 N-m)
650 in.-lb (73 N-m)
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Impulse Piping
The piping between the process and the transmitter must accurately transfer the pressure to
obtain accurate measurements. There are five possible sources of error: leaks, friction loss
(particularly if purging is used), trapped gas in a liquid line, liquid in a gas line, and density
variations between the legs.
The best location for the transmitter in relation to the process pipe depends on the process
itself. Use the following guidelines to determine transmitter location and placement of impulse
piping:
Installation
Keep impulse piping as short as possible.
For liquid service, slope the impulse piping at least 1 inch per foot (8 cm per m) upward
from the transmitter toward the process connection.
For gas service, slope the impulse piping at least 1 inch per foot (8 cm per m) downward
from the transmitter toward the process connection.
Avoid high points in liquid lines and low points in gas lines.
Make sure both impulse legs are the same temperature.
Use impulse piping large enough to avoid friction effects and blockage.
Vent all gas from liquid piping legs.
When using a sealing fluid, fill both piping legs to the same level.
When purging, make the purge connection close to the process taps and purge
through equal lengths of the same size pipe. Avoid purging through the transmitter.
Keep corrosive or hot (above 250 °F [121 °C]) process material out of direct contact
with the SuperModule and flanges.
Prevent sediment deposits in the impulse piping.
Keep the liquid head balanced on both legs of the impulse piping.
Avoid conditions that might allow process fluid to freeze within the process flange.
33
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Mounting Requirements
Refer to Figure 3.4.2 for examples of the following mounting configurations:
Liquid Flow Measurement
Place taps to the side of the line to prevent sediment deposits on the process isolators.
Mount the transmitter beside or below the taps so gases vent into the process line.
Mount drain/vent valve upward to allow gases to vent.
Gas Flow Measurement
Place taps in the top or side of the line.
Mount the transmitter beside or above the taps so to drain liquid into the process line.
Steam Flow Measurement
Place taps to the side of the line.
Mount the transmitter below the taps to ensure that impulse piping will remain filled
with condensate.
Fill impulse lines with water to prevent steam from contacting the transmitter directly
and to ensure accurate measurement start-up.
Note
For steam or other elevated temperature services, it is important that temperatures at the
Coplanar process flanges must not exceed 250 °F (121 °C) for transmitters with silicone fill, or
185 °F (85 °C) for inert fill. For vacuum service, these temperature limits are reduced to 220 °F
(104 °C) for silicone fill and 160 °F (71 °C) for inert fill.
3.4.2
Process Connections
3051 Wireless transmitter flange process connection size is 1/4–18 NPT. Flange adapters with
/2–14 NPT connections are available as the D2 option. Use your plant-approved lubricant or
sealant when making the process connections. The process connections on the transmitter
flange are on 21/8-inch (54 mm) centers to allow direct mounting to a three-valve or five-valve
manifold. Rotate one or both of the flange adapters to attain connection centers of 2 inches
(51 mm), 21/8 inches (54 mm), or 21/4 inches (57 mm).
Install and tighten all four flange bolts before applying pressure to avoid leakage. When properly
installed, the flange bolts will protrude through the top of the sensor module housing. Do not
attempt to loosen or remove the flange bolts while the transmitter is in service.
To install adapters to a Coplanar flange, perform the following procedure:
34
1.
Remove the flange bolts.
2.
Leaving the flange in place, move the adapters into position with the O-ring installed.
3.
Clamp the adapters and the Coplanar flange to the transmitter module using the longer
of the bolts supplied.
4.
Tighten the bolts. Refer to “Flange Bolts” on page 32 for torque specifications.
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Failure to install proper flange adapter o-rings may cause process leaks, which can result in death or
serious injury. The two flange adapters are distinguished by unique o-ring grooves. Only use the
o-ring that is designed for its specific flange adapter, as shown below.
ROSEMOUNT 3051S / 3051 / 2051 / 3001 / 3095 / 2024
Flange Adapter
O-ring
PTFE Based
Elastomer
ROSEMOUNT 1151
Flange Adapter
O-ring
PTFE
Elastomer
Note
PTFE O-rings should be replaced if the flange adapter is removed.
Whenever you remove flanges or adapters, visually inspect the Teflon® O-rings. Replace them if
there are any signs of damage, such as nicks or cuts. If you replace the O-rings, re-torque the
flange bolts after installation to compensate for cold flow. Refer to the process sensor body
reassembly procedure in Section 6: Troubleshooting on page 67.
Installation
35
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
3.4.3
Consider Housing Rotation
The housing can be rotated to improve field access to wiring or to better view the optional LCD
display. Perform the following procedure:
Figure 3-3. Housing rotation
A. Housing rotation screw (5/64-inch hex wrench required)
1.
Loosen the housing rotation set screw.
2.
Turn the housing up to 180 degrees to the left or right of its original (as shipped)
position.
Note
Do not rotate the housing more than 180 degrees without first performing a disassembly
procedure (see “Removing from Service” on page 72). Over-rotation may sever the electrical
connection between the sensor module and the feature board.
3.
Retighten the housing rotation set screw.
In addition to housing rotation, the optional LCD display can be rotated in 90-degree increments
by squeezing the two tabs, pulling out, rotating and snapping back into place.
Note
If LCD pins are inadvertently removed from the interface board, carefully re-insert the pins
before snapping the LCD display back into place.
3.4.4
Grounding
Transmitter Case
Always ground the transmitter case in accordance with national and local electrical codes. The
most effective transmitter case grounding method is a direct connection to earth ground with
minimal impedance. Methods for grounding the transmitter case include:
36
External Ground Assembly: This assembly is included with the optional transient
protection terminal block (Option Code T1), and it is included with various hazardous
location certifications. The External Ground Assembly can also be ordered with the
transmitter (Option Code V5), or as a spare part.
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
3.4.5
June 2012
Power Module Installation
Figure 3-4. Power Module
A. Housing rotation screw (5/64-inch hex wrench required)
To make connections, perform the following procedure:
3.4.6
1.
Remove the housing cover on the Power Module compartment side. The Power Module
supplies all power to the transmitter.
2.
Connect Power Module 701PGNKF.
3.
Replace the Power Module cover and tighten to safety specification (metal to metal).
Installing the LCD Display
Transmitters ordered with the LCD display will be shipped with the display installed.
Note
Only use Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002
Note
An LCD from a wired device will not function in a wireless device.
In addition to housing rotation, the optional LCD display can be rotated in 90-degree increments
by squeezing the two tabs, pulling out, rotating and snapping back into place.
If LCD pins are inadvertently removed from the interface board, carefully re-insert the pins
before snapping the LCD display back into place.
Use the following procedure and Figure 3-5 to install the LCD display:
Installation
37
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
1.
Remove the back cover and Power Module.
2.
Remove the transmitter cover opposite the field terminal side. Do not remove the
instrument covers in explosive environments when the circuit is live.
3.
Engage the four-pin connector into the LCD display and snap into place.
Note the following LCD temperature limits:
Operating:–40 to 175 °F (–40 to 80 °C)
Storage:–40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)
Figure 3-5. Optional LCD Display
3.5
Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral Manifolds
The Rosemount 305 is available in two designs: Traditional and Coplanar. The traditional 305
Integral Manifold can be mounted to most primary elements with mounting adapters in the
market today. The Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold is used with In-line transmitters to provide
block-and-bleed valve capabilities of up to 10000 psi (690 bar). The Rosemount 304 comes in
two basic styles: traditional (flange x flange and flange x pipe) and wafer. The 304 traditional
manifold comes in 2, 3, and 5-valve configurations. The 304 wafer manifold comes in 3 and 5
valve configurations.
38
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Figure 3-6. Integral Manifold Designs
3.5.1
Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure
To install a 305 Integral Manifold to a 3051 Wireless transmitter:
1.
Inspect the Teflon sensor module O-rings. If the O-rings are undamaged, reusing them
is recommended. If the O-rings are damaged (if they have nicks or cuts, for example),
replace them with new O-rings.
Important
If replacing the O-rings, take care not to scratch or deface the O-ring grooves or the surface of
the isolating diaphragm while you remove the damaged O-rings.
2.
Install the Integral Manifold on the sensor module. Use the four 2.25-in. manifold bolts
for alignment. Finger tighten the bolts, then tighten the bolts incrementally in a cross
pattern to final torque value. See “Flange Bolts” on page 32 for complete bolt
installation information and torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should
extend through the top of the module housing.
3.
If the Teflon sensor module O-rings have been replaced, the flange bolts should be
re-tightened after installation to compensate for cold flow of the O-rings.
4.
If applicable, install flange adapters on the process end of the manifold using the
1.75-in. flange bolts supplied with the transmitter.
Note
Always perform a zero trim on the transmitter/manifold assembly after installation to eliminate
mounting effects. See Section 5: Operation and Maintenance, “Zero Trim” on page 53.
3.5.2
Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure
The 306 Manifold is for use only with a 3051T Wireless In-line transmitter.
Assemble the 306 Manifold to the 3051T Wireless In-line transmitter with a thread sealant.
Installation
39
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
1.
Place transmitter into holding fixture.
2.
Apply appropriate thread paste or tape to threaded instrument end of the manifold.
3.
Count total threads on the manifold before starting assembly.
4.
Start turning the manifold by hand into the process connection on the transmitter.
Note
If using thread tape, be sure the thread tape does no strip when the manifold assembly is
started.
3.5.3
5.
Wrench tighten manifold into process connection. (Note: Minimum toque value is 425
in-lbs)
6.
Count how many threads are still showing. (Note: Minimum engagement is 3
revolutions)
7.
Subtract the number of threads showing (after tightening) from the total threads to
calculate the revolutions engaged. Further tighten until a minimum of 3 rotations is
achieved.
8.
For block and bleed manifold, verify the bleed screw is installed and tightened. For
two-valve manifold, verify the vent plug is installed and tightened.
9.
Leak-check assembly to maximum pressure range of transmitter.
Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold Installation
Procedure
To install a 304 Conventional Manifold to a 3051 Wireless transmitter:
3.5.4
1.
Align the Conventional Manifold with the transmitter flange. Use the four manifold
bolts for alignment.
2.
Finger tighten the bolts, then tighten the bolts incrementally in a cross pattern to final
torque value. See “Flange Bolts” on page 2-6 for complete bolt installation information
and torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should extend through the top of
the module housing.
3.
If applicable, install flange adapters on the process end of the manifold using the
1.75-in. flange bolts supplied with the transmitter.
Manifold Operation
Improper installation or operation of manifolds may result in process leaks, which may cause
death or serious injury.
Always perform a zero trim on the transmitter/manifold assembly after installation to eliminate
any shift due to mounting effects. See Section 5: Operation and Maintenance, “Sensor Trim
Overview” on page 52.
Three and five-valve configurations shown:
40
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
In normal operation the two block
valves between the process and
instrument ports will be open and the
equalizing valve will be closed.
Drain/
Vent
Valve
Drain/
Vent
Valve
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Isolate
(open)
Process
1.
To zero the 3051, close the
block valve to the low
pressure (downstream) side
of the transmitter first.
Drain/
Vent
Valve
Drain/
Vent
Valve
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Isolate
(closed)
Process
2.
Open the center (equalize)
valve to equalize the pressure
on both sides of the
transmitter. The manifold
valves are now in the proper
configuration for zeroing the
transmitter.
Drain/
Vent
Valve
Drain/
Vent
Valve
Equalize
(open)
Isolate
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Process
3.
After zeroing the transmitter,
close the equalizing valve.
Drain/
Vent
Valve
Drain/
Vent
Valve
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Process
4.
Open the block valve on the
low pressure side of the
transmitter to return the
transmitter to service.
Drain/
Vent
Valve
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Drain/
Vent
Valve
Isolate
(open)
Process
Installation
41
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Five-valve Natural Gas configurations shown:
In normal operation, the two block
valves between the process and
instrument ports will be open, and the
equalizing valves will be closed.
Test
(Plugged)
Test
(Plugged)
Equalize
(closed)
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Isolate
(open)
Process
1.
To zero the 3051, first close
the block valve on the low
pressure (downstream) side
of the transmitter.
Drain
Vent
Process
Test
(Plugged)
Test
(Plugged)
Equalize
(closed)
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Isolate
(closed)
Process
Drain
Vent
Process
Note
Do not open the low side equalize valve before the high side equalize valve. Doing so will
overpressure the transmitter.
2.
Open the equalize valve on
the high pressure (upstream)
side of the transmitter.
Test
(Plugged)
Test
(Plugged)
Equalize
(open)
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Process
42
Isolate
(closed)
Drain Vent
(closed)
Process
Installation
Reference Manual
Section 3: Installation
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
3.
Open the equalize valve on
the low pressure
(downstream) side of the
transmitter. The manifold is
now in the proper
configuration for zeroing the
transmitter.
Test
(Plugged)
Test
(Plugged)
Equalize
(open)
Isolate
(open)
Isolate
(closed)
Process
4.
After zeroing the transmitter,
close the equalize valve on
the low pressure
(downstream) side of the
transmitter.
Equalize
(open)
Drain Vent
(closed)
Process
Test
(Plugged)
Test
(Plugged)
Equalize
(open)
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Isolate
(closed)
Process
5.
Close the equalize valve on
the high pressure (upstream)
side.
Drain Vent
(closed)
Process
Test
(Plugged)
Test
(Plugged)
Equalize
(closed)
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Isolate
(closed)
Process
6.
Finally, to return the
transmitter to service, open
the low side isolation valve.
Drain Vent
(closed)
Process
Test
(Plugged)
Test
(Plugged)
Equalize
(closed)
Equalize
(closed)
Isolate
(open)
Process
Installation
Isolate
(open)
Drain Vent
(closed)
Process
43
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Installation
Section 3: Installation
June 2012
44
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Installation
Section 3: Installation
June 2012
45
Section 3: Installation
June 2012
46
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Installation
Section 4: Commissioning
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Section 4
Commissioning
Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 47
Network Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 48
Verify Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 48
4.1
Safety Messages
Instructions and procedures in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that potentially raises safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Please refer to the following safety messages before
performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
4.1.1
Warnings ( )
Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or
serious injury.
Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the
instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field
wiring practices.
Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the
appropriate hazardous locations certifications.
Process leaks could result in death or serious injury.
Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.
Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is in
service.
Electrical shock could cause death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
Note
The Rosemount 3051 Wireless and all other wireless devices should be installed only after the
Smart Wireless Gateway has been installed and is functioning properly.
Wireless devices should also be powered up in order of proximity from the Smart Wireless
Gateway, beginning with the closest device to the Smart Wireless GatewaySmart. This will result
in a simpler and faster network installation.
Commissioning
47
Section 4: Commissioning
4.2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Network Status
If the Rosemount 3051 Wireless was configured with the Network ID and Join Key and sufficient
time for network polling has passed, the transmitter should be connected to the network. To
verify connectivity, open the Smart Wireless Gateway’s integral web interface and navigate to
the Explorer page.
This page will display the transmitter’s HART tag, PV, SV, TV, QV, and Update Rate. A green
status indicator means that the device is working properly. A red indicator means that there is a
problem with either the device or its communication path. For more detail on a specific device,
click on the tag name.
4.3
Verify Operation
Operation can be verified in three locations, at the device via the Local Display, using the Field
Communicator, or at the Smart Wireless Gateway’s integrated web interface.
Local Display
The LCD will display the PV value at the same rate as the configured update rate, but no faster
than once every 60 seconds. Press the Diagnostic button to display the TAG, Device ID, Network
ID, Network Join Status and Device Status screens.
For Device Status screens, see “LCD Screen Messages” on page 57.
48
Commissioning
Reference Manual
Section 4: Commissioning
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Figure 4-1. Diagnostic Screen Sequence
Tag
Device ID
Network ID
Abcde
id - 12
netwk
Network Join
Device Status
Status
13 0 5
fgh
ID
345678
netwk
Suply
OK
volts
7. 2 1
Figure 4-2. Network Join Status Screens
Searching for
Network
Joining Network
Connected with
Limited
Bandwidth
Connected
NETwK
netwk
netwk
netwk
SRCHNG
NEGOT
LIM-OP
OK
Field Communicator
To verify device operation using a HART Field Communicator, a 3051 Wireless DD is required.
For connecting with a Field Communicator, refer to Figure 2-1 on page 11.
Function
Communications
Key Sequence
Menu Items
3, 3
Join Status, Wireless Mode, Join Mode, Number of
Available Neighbors, Number of Advertisements
Heard, Number of Join Attempts.
Smart Wireless Gateway
To verify device operation using the Smart Wireless Gateway’s integrated web interface,
navigate to the Explorer page. This page will show whether the device has joined the network
and if it is communicating properly.
Commissioning
49
Section 4: Commissioning
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
A green status indicator means that the device is working properly. A red indicator means that
there is a problem with either the device or its communication path. For more detail on a
specific device, click on the tag name.
Troubleshooting
The most common cause of incorrect operation is incorrect configuration of the Network ID and
Join Key. The Network ID and Join Key in the device must match that of the Smart Wireless
Gateway. The Network ID and Join Key may be obtained from the Smart Wireless Gateway on
the Setup>Network>Settings page of the web interface.
50
Commissioning
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Section 5
Operation and Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 51
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 51
LCD Screen Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 57
5.1
Overview
This section contains information on commissioning and operating 3051 Wireless Pressure
Transmitters.
Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For
convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled “Fast Keys” for each software
function below the appropriate headings.
5.2
Calibration
Calibrating a 3051 Wireless transmitter may include the following procedures:
Sensor Trim: Adjusts the position of the factory sensor characterization curve to
optimize performance over a specified pressure range, or to adjust for mounting
effects.
The 3051 sensor module uses a microprocessor that contains information about the sensor’s
specific characteristics in response to pressure and temperature inputs. A smart transmitter
compensates for these sensor variations. The process of generating the sensor performance
profile is called factory sensor characterization.
Sensor trimming requires an accurate pressure input and adds additional compensation that
adjusts the position of the factory sensor characterization curve to optimize performance over a
specific pressure range.
Note
Sensor trimming adjusts the position of the factory sensor characterization curve. It is possible
to degrade performance of the transmitter if the trim is done improperly or with inaccurate
equipment.
Operation and Maintenance
51
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 5-1. Recommended Calibration Tasks
Transmitter
3051CD
3051CG
3051L
3051TG, Range
1-4
3051CA
3051TA
3051TG, Range 5
Bench Calibration Tasks
1.
Set output configuration parameters:
a.
Set the range points.
b.
Set the output units.
c.
Set the output type.
d.
Set the damping value.
Field Calibration Tasks
1.
Reconfigure parameters if
necessary.
2.
Zero trim the transmitter to
compensate for mounting effects
or static pressure effects.
Optional: Perform an analog output
trim. (Accurate multimeter
required)
Reconfigure parameters if
necessary.
2.
Optional: Perform a sensor trim.
(Accurate pressure source required.)
3.
1.
Set output configuration parameters:
1.
2.
a.
Set the range points.
b.
Set the output units.
c.
Set the output type.
d.
Set the damping value.
Optional: Perform a sensor trim if
equipment available (accurate
absolute pressure source required),
otherwise perform the low trim value
section of the sensor trim procedure.
2.
Perform low trim value section of
the sensor trim procedure to
correct for mounting position
effects.
3.
Optional: Perform an analog output
trim (Accurate multimeter
required)
Note:
A Field Communicator or AMS is required for all sensor and output trim procedures.
Rosemount 3051C Range 4 and Range 5 transmitters require a special calibration procedure
when used in differential pressure applications under high static line pressure.
5.2.1
Sensor Trim Overview
Trim the sensor using either sensor or zero trim functions. Trim functions vary in complexity and
are application-dependent. Both trim functions alter the transmitter’s interpretation of the
input signal.
Zero trim is a single-point offset adjustment. It is useful for compensating for mounting position
effects and is most effective when performed with the transmitter installed in its final mounting
position. Since this correction maintains the slope of the characterization curve, it should not be
used in place of a sensor trim over the full sensor range.
When performing a zero trim, ensure that the equalizing valve is open and all wet legs are filled
to the correct levels.
Note
Do not perform a zero trim on 3051 Wireless absolute pressure transmitters. Zero trim is zero
based, and absolute pressure transmitters reference absolute zero. To correct mounting
position effects on a 3051 Wireless absolute pressure transmitter, perform a low trim within the
sensor trim function. The low trim function provides an offset correction similar to the zero trim
function, but it does not require zero-based input.
52
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Sensor trim is a two-point sensor calibration where two end-point pressures are applied, and all
output is linearized between them. Always adjust the low trim value first to establish the correct
offset. Adjustment of the high trim value provides a slope correction to the characterization
curve based on the low trim value. The trim values allow you to optimize performance over your
specified measuring range at the calibration temperature.
During a trim operation, the 3051 Wireless is placed in high power refresh mode, which
provides frequent pressure measurement updates and allows the configured damping to take
effect. This behavior allows for more accurate calibration of the device. When the device is in
high power refresh mode, the battery power supply will be depleted more rapidly.
5.2.2
Zero Trim
Fast Keys
2, 1, 3
Note
The transmitter must be within three percent of true zero (zero-based) in order to calibrate with
zero trim function.
After properly venting the transmitter, calibrate the transmitter with the zero trim function:
5.2.3
1.
From the Home screen, select 2: Configure.
2.
Select 1: Guided Setup.
3.
Select 3: Zero Trim and follow the on-screen instruction to complete the zero trim
adjustment.
Sensor Trim
Fast Keys
3, 4, 1
Note
Use a pressure input source that is at least three times more accurate than the transmitter, and
allow the input pressure to stabilize for ten seconds before entering any values.
To calibrate the transmitter using the sensor trim function:
1.
Assemble and power the entire calibration system including the 3051, Field
Communicator/AMS, power supply, pressure input source, and readout device.
2.
From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools.
3.
Select 4: Routine Maintenance.
4.
Select 1: Sensor Calibration.
5.
Select 4: Lower Sensor Trim. The lower sensor trim value should be the sensor trim
point that is closest to zero.
6.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the adjustment of the lower value.
7.
Repeat the procedure for the upper value. Select 5: Upper Sensor Trim and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the adjustment of the upper value.
Operation and Maintenance
53
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Note
Select pressure input values so that lower and upper values are equal to or outside the Lower
and Upper Operating points. Do not attempt to obtain reverse output by reversing the high and
low points. The transmitter allows approximately five percent deviation.
5.2.4
Recall Factory Trim—Sensor Trim
Fast Keys
3, 4, 1, 6
The Recall Factory Trim—Sensor Trim command allows the restoration of the as-shipped factory
settings of the sensor trim. This command can be useful for recovering from an inadvertent zero
trim of an absolute pressure unit or inaccurate pressure source.
To restore sensor trim to as-shipped factory settings:
5.2.5
1.
From the Home screen, Select 3: Service Tools.
2.
Select 4: Routine Maintenance.
3.
Select 1: Sensor Calibration.
4.
Select 6: Recall Factory Trim.
Line Pressure Effect (Range 2 and Range 3)
The following specifications show the static pressure effect for the Rosemount 3051 Range 2
and Range 3 pressure transmitters used in differential pressure applications where line pressure
exceeds 2000 psi (138 bar).
Zero Effect
± 0.1% of the upper range limit plus an additional ± 0.1% of upper range limit error for each 1000
psi (69 bar) of line pressure above 2000 psi (138 bar).
Example: Line pressure is 3000 psi (207 bar) for Ultra performance transmitter. Zero effect error
calculation:
± {0.05 + 0.1 x [3 kpsi - 2 kpsi]} = ± 0.15% of the upper range limit
Span Effect
Refer to “Line Pressure Effect” on page 82.
5.2.6
Compensating for Line Pressure (Range 4 and Range 5)
The Rosemount 3051 Wireless Range 4 and 5 pressure transmitters require a special calibration
procedure when used in differential pressure applications. The purpose of this procedure is to
optimize transmitter performance by reducing the effect of static line pressure in these
applications. The 3051 Wireless differential pressure transmitters (Ranges 1, 2, and 3) do not
require this procedure because optimization occurs in the sensor.
54
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Applying high static pressure to the 3051 Wireless Range 4 and Range 5 pressure transmitters
causes a systematic shift in the output. This shift is linear with static pressure; correct it by
performing the “Sensor Trim” procedure on page 53.
The following specifications show the static pressure effect for the 3051 Wireless Range 4 and
Range 5 transmitters used in differential pressure applications:
Zero Effect:
± 0.1% of the upper range limit per 1000 psi (69 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 2000 psi (0 to
138 bar)
For line pressures above 2000 psi (138 bar), the zero effect error is ± 0.2% of the upper range
limit plus an additional ± 0.2% of upper range limit error for each 1000 psi (69 bar) of line
pressure above 2000 psi (138 bar).
Example: Line pressure is 3000 psi (3 kpsi). Zero effect error calculation:
± {0.2 + 0.2 x [3 kpsi - 2 kpsi]} = ± 0.4% of the upper range limit
Span Effect:
Correctable to ±0.2% of reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 3626 psi (0 to
250 bar)
The systematic span shift caused by the application of static line pressure is -1.00% of reading
per 1000 psi (69 bar) for Range 4 transmitters, and -1.25% of reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) for
Range 5 transmitters.
Use the following example to compute corrected input values.
Example
A transmitter with model number 3051_CD4 will be used in a differential pressure application
where the static line pressure is 1200 psi (83 bar). The transmitter output is ranged with 4 mA at
500 inH2O (1,2 bar) and 20 mA at 1500 inH2O (3,7 bar).
To correct for systematic error caused by high static line pressure, first use the following
formulas to determine corrected values for the low trim and high trim.
Operation and Maintenance
55
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
LT = LRV + S x (LRV) x P
Where:
LT =
Corrected Low Trim Value
LRV =
Lower Range Value
S=
–(Span shift per specification)
P=
Static Line Pressure
HT = URV + S x (URV) x P
Where:
HT =
Corrected High Trim Value
URV =
Upper Range Value
S=
–(Span shift per specification)
P=
Static Line Pressure
URV =
1500 inH2O (3.74 bar)
LRV =
500 inH2O (1.25 bar)
P=
1200 psi (82.74 bar)
S=
± 0.01/1000
In this example:
To calculate the low trim (LT) value:
LT =
500 + (0.01/1000)(500)(1200)
LT =
506 inH2O (1.26 bar)
To calculate the high trim (HT) value:
HT =
1500 + (0.01/1000)(1500)(1200)
HT =
1518 inH2O (3.78 bar)
Complete a 3051 Wireless sensor trim and enter the corrected values for low trim (LT) and high
trim (HT), refer to “Sensor Trim” on page 53.
Enter the corrected input values for low trim and high trim through the Field Communicator
keypad after you apply the nominal value of pressure as the transmitter input.
Note
After sensor trimming 3051 Wireless Range 4 and 5 transmitters for high differential pressure
applications, verify that the Lower and Upper Operating points are at nominal values using the
Field Communicator.
56
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
5.3
LCD Screen Messages
5.3.1
Startup Screen Sequence
The following screens will display when the Power Module is first connected to the Rosemount
3051 Wireless.
XXXXX
XXXXxxx
xxxxxx
3051
All Segments On: used to visually
determine if there are any bad
segments on the LCD
Device Identification: used to
determine Device Type.
WIrels
Abcde
fgh
PRESS
5 8. 0
Device Information - Tag: user
entered tag which is eight
characters long - will not display if
all characters are blank
PV Screen - process pressure
PSI
Operation and Maintenance
57
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
SNSR
2 5. 0 0
SV Screen - sensor temperature
value
deg c
DEV
2 5. 2 5
TV Screen - device temperature
value
deg c
Suply
7. 2 1
QV Screen - voltage reading at the
power supply terminals
volts
PRCNT
7. 2 1
Percent Range Screen - percent
range reading
RANGE
alert
presnt
58
Alert Screen - at least one alert is
present - this screen will not
display if no alerts are present
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
5.3.2
June 2012
Diagnostic Button Screen Sequence
The following five screens will display when the device is operating properly and the Diagnostic
Button has been pressed.
Abcde
fgh
id - 12
Device Information - Tag: user
entered tag which is eight
characters long - will not display if
all characters are blank
Device Identification: used to
determine Device ID
345678
netwk
13 0 5
ID
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 3:
assuming the device has the
correct join key, this ID tells the
user what network the device can
connect with
Diagnostic Button Screen 4: the device has joined a
network and has been fully configured and has
multiple parents
OK
Operation and Maintenance
59
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Suply
7. 2 1
Diagnostic Button Screen 5:
voltage reading at the power
supply terminals
volts
5.3.3
Network Diagnostic Status Screens
These screens display the network status of the device. Only one will be shown during the
startup sequence or diagnostic sequence.
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.1: the device is
attempting to start the radio
unknwn
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.2: the device has just
restarted
INIT
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.3: the device is starting
to join the process
idle
60
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.4: the device is in a
disconnected state and requires a “Force Join”
command to join the network
DISCNT
NETwK
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.5: the device is
searching for the Network
SRCHNG
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.6: the device is
attempting to join a network
NEGOT
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.7: the device is
connected to the Network, but is in a
“Quarantined” state
conect
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.8: the device is joined
and operational, but is running with limited
bandwidth for sending periodic data
LIM-OP
Operation and Maintenance
61
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
netwk
Diagnostic Button Screen 4.9: the device has joined
a network and has been fully configured and has
multiple parents
OK
62
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
5.3.4
June 2012
Device Diagnostic Screens
The following screens will show the device diagnostics depending on the state of the device.
DEV
fAilur
PRESS
5 8. 0
Device Information - Status: there
is a critical error which may
prevent the device from
operating correctly. Check
additional status screens for more
information.
PV Screen - process pressure
value
PSI
SNSR
2 5. 0 0
SV Screen - sensor temperature
value
deg c
DEV
2 5. 2 5
TV Screen - device temperature
value
deg c
Operation and Maintenance
63
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Suply
7. 2 1
QV Screen - voltage reading at the
power supply terminals
volts
PRCNT
7. 2 1
Percent Range Screen - percent
range reading
RANGE
alert
presnt
Abcde
fgh
id - 12
345678
64
Alert Screen - at least one alert is
present - this screen will not
display if no alerts are present
Diagnostic Button Screen 1 - Tag:
user entered tag which is eight
characters long - will not display if
all characters are blank
Diagnostic Button Screen 2: the
device’s identifier that is used to
make up the HART long address the Smart Wireless Gateway may
use this to help identify devices if
no unique user tag is available
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
suply
failur
suply
low
radio
failur
confg
failur
Operation and Maintenance
Diagnostic Button Screen 7.1: the
terminal voltage has dropped
below level of operating limit.
Replace the Power Module
(Part Number: 701PGNKF)
Diagnostic Button Screen 7.2: the
terminal voltage is below the
recommended operating range if this is a battery operated device,
the Power Module should be
replaced - for line powered
devices, the supply voltage
should be increased
Diagnostic Button Screen 8: the
device may not be able to
communicate with the radio or
the radio has an internal error. In
this state the device may still be
operational and publishing HART
data
Diagnostic Button Screen 9.1:
configuration of the transmitter is
invalid such that critical operation
of the device may be affected check the extended configuration
status to identify which
configuration item(s) need to be
corrected
65
Reference Manual
Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
confg
warn
snsr
failur
snsr
warn
Diagnostic Button Screen 9.2:
configuration of the transmitter is
invalid such that non-critical
operation of the device may be
affected - check the extended
configuration status to identify
which configuration item(s) need
to be corrected
Diagnostic Button Screen 10.1: a
sensor attached to the
transmitter has failed, and valid
readings from that sensor are no
longer possible - check the sensor
and sensor wiring connections check additional status for more
detailed information of the failure
source
Diagnostic Button Screen 10.2: a
sensor attached to the
transmitter is degraded, readings
from that sensor may not be
within accuracy specifications check the process, and sensor
wiring connections - check
additional status for more
detailed information of the
warning source
Note
Use the Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002.
66
Operation and Maintenance
Section 6: Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Section 6
Troubleshooting
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 67
Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 67
Disassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 72
Reassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75
6.1
Overview
Table 6-2 provides summarized maintenance and troubleshooting suggestions for the most
common operating problems.
If you suspect malfunction despite the absence of any diagnostic messages on the Field
Communicator display, consider using Section X.X on page XX to identify any potential problem
6.2
Safety Messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing
an operation preceded by this symbol.
Troubleshooting
67
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
6.2.1
Warnings ( )
Explosions could result in death or serious injury:
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the
appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review
the approvals section of the 3051 reference manual for any restrictions associated with a
safe installation.
Before connecting a HART-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make
sure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or
non-incendive field wiring practices.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
conditions.
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 8 in. (20
cm) from all persons.
The Power Module may be replaced in a hazardous area. The Power Module has surface
resistivity greater than one gigaohm and must be properly installed in the wireless device
enclosure. Care must be taken during transportation to and from the point of installation to
prevent a potential electrostatic charging hazard.
Polymer enclosure has surface resistivity greater than one gigaohm. Care must be taken
during transportation to and from the point of installation to prevent a potential
electrostatic charging hazard.
Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.
To avoid process leaks, only use the o-ring designed to seal with the corresponding
flange adapter.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and the terminals. High voltage that may be present on
leads can cause electrical shock.
Table 6-1. Rosemount 3051 Wireless Device Status Information
Device Status
Description
Electronics Failure
An electronics error that could
impact the device measement
reading has occurred.
Radio Failure
Supply Voltage
Failure
68
The wireless radio has detected a
failure or stopped communicating.
The supply voltage is too low for
the device to function properly.
Recommended Action
1.
Reset the device
2.
Reconfirm all configuration items in the device
3.
If the condition persists, replace the electronics
1.
Reset the device
2.
If the condition persists, replace the electronics
1.
Replace the Power Module
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 5: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Device Status
Description
Electronics Warning
The device has detected an
electronics error that does not
currently impact the device
measurement reading.
Pressure has
Exceeded Limits
Electronics
Temperature has
Exceeded Limits
The sensor has exceeded the
maximum measurement range.
The electronics temperature has
exceeded the transmitter's
maximum range.
Recommended Action
1.
Reset the device
2.
Reconfirm all configuration items in the device
3.
If the condition persists, replace the electronics
1.
Check process for possible saturation condition
2.
Verify that the appropriate sensor was chosen for the
application
3.
Reconfirm sensor configuration
4.
Reset the device
5.
Replace the sensor
1.
Verify environmental temperature is within the
transmitter’s range
2.
Remote mount the transmitter away from process
and environmental conditions
3.
Reset the device
4.
If the condition persists, replace the electronics
Supply Voltage Low
The supply voltage is low and may
soon affect broadcast updates.
1.
Replace the Power Module
Database Memory
Warning
The device has failed to write to
the database memory. Any data
written during this time may have
been lost.
1.
Reset the device
2.
Reconfirm all configuration items in the device
3.
If logging dynamic data not needed, this advisory
can be safely ignored
4.
If the condition persists, replace the electronics
1.
Click on details for more information
2.
Correct the parameter that has a configuration error
3.
Reset the device
4.
If the condition persists, replace the electronics
1.
Verify that the process variable is within user
specified limits
2.
Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit
3.
If not needed, disable this alert
Configuration Error
HI HI Alarm
Troubleshooting
The device has detected a
configuration error based on a
change to the device.
The primary variable has surpassed
the user defined limit.
69
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Device Status
Description
HI Alarm
The primary variable has surpassed
the user defined limit.
LO Alarm
LO LO Alarm
Button Stuck
Simulation Active
70
The primary variable has surpassed
the user defined limit.
The primary variable has surpassed
the user defined limit.
A buttons on the Electronics Board
is detected as stuck in the active
position.
The device is in simulation mode
and may not be reporting actual
information.
Recommended Action
1.
Verify that the process variable is within user
specified limits
2.
Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit
3.
If not needed, disable this alert
1.
Verify that the process variable is within user
specified limits
2.
Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit
3.
If not needed, disable this alert
1.
Verify that the process variable is within user
specified limits
2.
Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit
3.
If not needed, disable this alert
1.
Check the buttons for obstructions
2.
Reset the device
3.
If the condition persists, replace the electronics
1.
Verify that simulation is no longer required
2.
Disable Simulation mode in Service Tools
3.
Reset the device
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 5: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 6-2. Rosemount 3051 Wireless Troubleshooting
Symptom
Recommended Actions
Transmitter will not respond to changes in
applied pressure
Check test equipment
Check impulse piping or manifold for blockage
Verify applied pressure is within sensor limits
Digital Pressure Variable reading is low or
high
Check test equipment (verify accuracy)
Check impulse piping for blockage or low fill in wet leg
Verify transmitter is calibrated properly
Verify pressure calculations for application
Digital Pressure Variable reading is erratic
Check application for faulty equipment in pressure line
Verify transmitter is not reacting directly to equipment turning on/off
LCD display is not functioning
Reseat the LCD according to “Installing the LCD Display” on page 37
Verify that the LCD display is a wireless LCD Meter. An LCD from a wired device will
not function in a wireless device. Rosemount part number: 00753-9004-0002
Verify that the LCD display mode is not disabled.
Table 6-3. Wireless Network Troubleshooting
Symptom
Recommended Actions
Device not joining the network
Verify network ID and join key
Wait longer (30 min.)
Enable High Speed Operation on Smart Wireless Gateway
Check Power Module
Verify device is within range of at least one other device
Verify network is in active network advertise
Power Cycle device to try again
Verify device is configured to join. Send the “Force Join” command to the device
See troubleshooting section of Smart Wireless Gateway for more information
Short battery life
Check that “Power Always On” mode is off
Verify device is not installed in extreme temperatures
Verfiy that device is not a network pinch point
Check for excessive network rejoins due to poor connectivity
Limited Bandwidth Error
Reduce the Update Rate on transmitter
Increase communication paths by adding more wireless points
Check that device has been online for at least an hour
Check that device is not routing through a “limited” routing node
Create a new network with an additional Smart Wireless Gateway
Troubleshooting
71
Section 6: Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
6.3
Disassembly Procedures
6.3.1
Removing from Service
Follow these steps:
1.
Follow all plant safety rules and procedures.
2.
Isolate and vent the process from the transmitter before removing the transmitter from
service.
3.
Remove the transmitter from the process connection.
a.
The Rosemount 3051C Wireless transmitter is attached to the process connection by
four bolts and two cap screws. Remove the bolts and screws and separate the
transmitter from the process connection. Leave the process connection in place and
ready for re-installation. Reference Figure X-X on page 43 for coplanar flange.
b. The Rosemount 3051T Wireless transmitter is attached to the process by a single hex
nut process connection. Loosen the hex nut to separate the transmitter from the
process. Do not wrench on neck of transmitter. See warning in "Inline process
connection' on page XX.
72
4.
Do not scratch, puncture, or depress the isolating diaphragms.
5.
Clean isolating diaphragms with a soft rag and a mild cleaning solution, and rinse with
clear water.
6.
Whenever you remove the process flange or flange adapters, visually inspect the PTFE
o-rings. Replace the o-rings if they show any signs of damage, such as nicks or cuts.
Undamaged o-rings may be reused.
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 5: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
6.3.2
June 2012
Removing the electronics board
The Wireless electronics board is located in the electronics compartment. To remove the
assembly, perform the following procedure.
1.
Remove the housing cover opposite the field terminal side.
2.
Remove the LCD Display, if applicable. To do this, hold in the two clips and pull outward.
Note
The electronics board is electrostatically sensitive; observe handling precautions for
static-sensitive components.
3.
Loosen the two small screws located on the assembly.
4.
Replace the LCD Display. This will help in removing the assembly.
Note
If an LCD is installed, use caution as there is an electronic pin connector that interfaces between
the LCD and electronics board.
Troubleshooting
5.
Pull out the assembly to expose and locate the sensor module connector.
6.
Grasp the sensor module connector, squeeze the clips and pull upwards
(avoid pulling wires).
73
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Figure 6-1. Sensor module connector view
Wireless Housing
6.3.3
Removing the sensor from the housing
Note
To prevent damage to the senser module cable, disconnect it from the PlantWeb assembly
before you remove the senser module from the housing.
74
1.
Loosen the housing rotation screw with a 3/32-inch hex wrench, then rotate back one full
turn.
2.
Unscrew the housing from the senser module.
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Section 5: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
6.4
Reassembly procedures
6.5
Reassembly procedures
1.
Inspect all cover and housing (non-process wetted) O-rings and replace if necessary.
Lightly grease with silicone lubricant to ensure a good seal.
2.
Carefully tuck the cable connector completely inside the internal black cap. To do so,
turn the black cap and cable counterclockwise one rotation to tighten the cable.
3.
Lower the electronics housing onto the module. Guide the internal black cap and cable
on the sensor module through the housing and into the external black cap.
4.
Turn the module clockwise into the housing.
Important
Make sure the sensor ribbon cable and internal black cap remain completely free of the housing
as you rotate it. Damage can occur to the cable if the internal black cap and ribbon cable
become hung up and rotate with the housing.
6.5.1
6.5.2
5.
Thread the housing completely onto the sensor module. The housing must be no more
than one full turn from flush with the sensor module to comply with explosion proof
requirements.
6.
Tighten the housing rotation set screw using a 5/64-inch hex wrench.
Attaching electronics board
1.
Remove the cable connector from its position inside of the internal black cap and attach
it to the electronics board.
2.
Using the two captive screws as handles, insert the electronics board into the housing.
Make sure the power posts from the electronics housing properly engage the
receptacles on the electronics board. Do not force. The electronics board should slide
gently on the connections.
3.
Tighten the captive mounting screws.
4.
Replace the electronics housing cover. The transmitter covers must be engaged
metal-to-metal to ensure a proper seal and to meet Explosion-Proof requirements.
Reassembling the 3051C process flange
1.
Inspect the sensor module PTFE o-rings. Undamaged o-rings may be reused. Replace
o-rings that show any signs of damage, such as nicks, cuts, or general wear.
See “Safety Messages” on page 67 for complete warning
Troubleshooting
75
Reference Manual
Section 6: Troubleshooting
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Note
If you are replacing the o-rings, be careful not to scratch the o-ring grooves or the surface of the
isolating diaphragm when removing the damaged o-rings.
2.
Install the process connection. Possible options include:
a.
Coplanar Process Flange:
–
Hold the process flange in place by installing the two alignment screws to
finger tightness (screws are not pressure retaining). Do not overtighten as this
will affect module-to-flange alignment.
–
Install the four 1.75-in. flange bolts by finger tightening them to the flange.
b. Coplanar Process Flange with Flange Adapters:
c.
–
Hold the process flange in place by installing the two alignment screws to
finger tightness (screws are not pressure retaining). Do not overtighten as this
will affect module-to-flange alignment.
–
Hold the flange adapters and adapter o-rings in place while installing (in the
desired of the four possible process connection spacing configurations) using
four 2.88-inch bolts to mount securely to the coplanar flange. For gage
pressure configurations, use two 2.88-inch bolts and two 1.75-inch bolts
Manifold:
–
Contact the manifold manufacturer for the appropriate bolts and procedures.
3.
Tighten the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossed pattern. See Table 6-4 on
page 6-76 for appropriate torque values.
4.
Using same cross pattern, tighten bolts to final torque values seen in Table 6-4 on
page 6-76.
Table 6-4. Bolt installation torque values
Bolt material
Initial torque value
Final torque value
CS-ASTM-A445 Standard
300 in-lb. (34 N-m)
650 in-lb. (73 N-m)
316 SST—Option L4
150 in-lb. (17 N-m)
300 in-lb. (34 N-m)
ASTM-A-19 B7M—Option L5
300 in-lb. (34 N-m)
650 in-lb. (73 N-m)
ASTM-A-193 Class 2, Grade B8M—Option L8
150 in.-lb (17 N-m)
300 in.-lb (34 N-m)
Note
If you replaced the PTFE sensor module o-rings, re-torque the flange bolts after installation to
compensate for cold flow.
Note
For Range 1 transmitters: after replacing o-rings and re-installing the process flange, expose the
transmitter to a temperature of 185 °F (85 °C) for two hours. Then re-tighten the flange bolts in
a cross pattern, and again expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 °F (85 °C) for two
hours before calibration.
See “Safety Messages” on page 67 for complete warning
76
Troubleshooting
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 1. 3051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Product Certifications
Standard
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I7
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust
INMETRO Intrinsic Safety
China Intrinsic Safety
TIIS Intrinsic Safety
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
Drinking Water Approval
Standard
DW(11)
Standard
★
NSF drinking water approval
Bolting Material
Standard
L4
L5
L6
Standard
★
★
★
Austenitic 316 SST Bolts
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Bolts
Alloy K-500 Bolts
Display and Interface Options
Standard
M5
Standard
★
LCD Display
Calibration Certificate
Standard
Q4
QG
QP
Standard
★
★
★
Calibration Certificate
Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate
Calibration certification and tamper evident seal
Material Traceability Certification
Standard
Q8
Standard
★
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B
Configuration Buttons
Standard
DZ
Standard
★
Digital Zero Trim
Software Configuration
Standard
C1
Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order)
Standard
★
Gage Pressure Calibration
Standard
C3
Gage Calibration (Model 3051CA4 only)
Standard
★
Pressure Testing
Expanded
P1
Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate
Cleaning Process Area
Expanded
P2
98
Cleaning for Special Service
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 1. 3051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
P3
Cleaning for <1 PPM Chlorine/Fluorine
Pressure Calibration
Expanded
P4
Calibrate at Line Pressure (Specify Q48 on order for corresponding certificate)
High Accuracy
Standard
P8(12)
0.04% Accuracy to 5:1 turndown (Range 2-4)
Standard
★
Flange Adapters
Standard
DF(13)
D3
/2 -14 NPT flange adapter(s)
¼–18 NPT Process Connections (No flange adapters)
Standard
★
Vent/Drain Valves
Expanded
D7
Coplanar Flange Without Drain/Vent Ports
RC1/4 RC1/2 Process Connection
Expanded
D9(14)
RC ¼ Flange with RC ½ Flange Adapter, CS - SST
Max Static Line Pressure
Standard
P9
4500 psig (310 bar) Static Pressure Limit (3051CD Ranges 2–5 only)
Standard
★
Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals
Standard
★
Surface Finish
Standard
Q16
Toolkit Total System Performance Reports
Standard
QZ
Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report
Standard
★
Typical Model Number: 3051CD 2 A 2 2 A 1 A B4$13857 780
(1)Wireless output (code X) available in absolute measurement type (Code A) with only range 1-4, 316L SST isolating diaphragm material
(code 2), silicone fill fluid (code 1), and housing code (code P).
(2)Wireless output (code X) available in draft range 0 with only 316L SST isolating diaphragm (code 2), silicone fill fluid (code 1), housing
code (code P), process flange (code 0), glass-filled o-ring (code A), and bolting option (code L4).
(3)Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments.
Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for
sour refining environments.
(4)Requires 0 code in Materials of Construction for Alternate Process Connection.
(5)Not valid with optional code P9 for 4500 psi Static Pressure.
(6)“Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
(7)Process Flange limited to Coplanar (codes 2, 3, 5, 7, 8) or Traditional (H2, H3, H7).
(8)Not valid with optional code D9 for RC1/2 Adaptors.
(9)Not valid for optional codes DF and D9 for Adaptors.
(10)Panel mounting bolts are not supplied.
(11)Not available with Alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all Cast Alloy C-276 flanges, all plated CS flanges, all DIN
flanges, all Level flanges, assemble-to manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3
and S4 codes), surface finish certification (Q16 code), and remote seal system report (QZ code).
(12)Only available with Standard 3051. See specification section for more information.
(13)Not valid with Alternate Process Connection options S3, S4, S5, and S6.
Specifications and Reference Data
99
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
June 2012
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
(14)Not available with Alternate Process Connection; DIN Flanges and Level Flanges.
100
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
A.5.3
Rosemount 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter
This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 3051T
configurations:
Configuration
Transmitter Output Code
4-20 mA HART®
-3051
-Enhanced 3051(1)
FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Profibus
3051T In-Line
Pressure Transmitter
(1)The enhanced 4-20 mA HART device can be ordered with Transmitter Output option code
A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7.
See Options for more details on each configuration.
Additional Information
Dimensional Drawings: page 93
Table 2. 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Transmitter Type
3051T
In-Line Pressure Transmitter
Pressure Type
Standard
A(1)
Standard
★
★
Gage
Absolute
Pressure Range
3051TG(2)
Standard
-14.7 to 30 psi (-1.0 to 2.1 bar)
-14.7 to 150 psi (-1.0 to 10.3 bar)
-14.7 to 800 psi (-1.0 to 55 bar)
-14.7 to 4000 psi (-1.0 to 276 bar)
-14.7 to 10000 psi (-1.0 to 689 bar)
3051TA
0 to 30 psia (0 to 2.1 bar)
0 to 150 psia (0 to 10.3 bar)
0 to 800 psia (0 to 55 bar)
0 to 4000 psia (0 to 276 bar)
0 to 10000 psia (0 to 689 bar)
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
Transmitter Output
Standard
Wireless
Standard
★
Process Connection Style
Standard
2B
2C(3)
Expanded
2F
61
/2–14 NPT Female
G½ A DIN 16288 Male (Available in SST for Range 1–4 only)
Standard
★
★
Coned and Threaded, Compatible with Autoclave Type F-250-C (Range 5 only)
Non-threaded Instrument flange (Range 1-4 only)
Specifications and Reference Data
101
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 2. 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Isolating Diaphragm
Process Connection Wetted Parts
Material
Standard
2(4)
3(4)
316L SST
Alloy C-276
316L SST
Alloy C-276
Standard
★
★
Sensor Fill Fluid
Standard
Standard
★
Silicone
Housing Material
Conduit Entry Size
Standard
No conduit entries
Engineered polymer
Standard
★
Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)
Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol
Standard
WA3
Standard
★
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART
PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality
Standard
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
Standard
★
Options (Include with selected model number)
Integral Assembly
Standard
S5(5)
Assemble to Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold
Standard
★
Diaphragm Seal Assemblies
Standard
S1(5)
Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 seal
Standard
★
Mounting Bracket(6)
Standard
B4
Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting, All SST
Standard
★
Product Certifications
Standard
I1
I2
I3
I5
I7
ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust
INMETRO Intrinsic Safety
China Intrinsic Safety
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
Drinking Water Approval
Standard
DW(7)
NSF drinking water approval
Standard
★
Calibration Certification
Standard
Q4
QG
102
Calibration Certificate
Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate
Standard
★
★
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Table 2. 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
QP
Calibration Certification and tamper evident seal
★
Material Traceability Certification
Standard
Q8
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B
Standard
★
Configuration Buttons
Standard
DZ
Digital Zero Trim
Standard
★
Display and Interface Options
Standard
M5
Standard
★
LCD Display
Wireless Sensor Module
Standard
WSM
Wireless SST Sensor Module
Standard
★
Software Configuration
Standard
C1(6)
Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order)
Standard
★
Pressure Testing
Expanded
P1
Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate
Cleaning Process Area(8)
Expanded
P2
P3
Cleaning for Special Service
Cleaning for <1 PPM Chlorine/Fluorine
High Accuracy
Standard
P8(9)
0.04% Accuracy to 5:1 turndown (Range 2-4)
Standard
★
Surface Finish
Standard
Q16
Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals
Standard
★
Toolkit Total System Performance Reports
Standard
QZ
Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report
Typical Model Number:
Standard
★
3051T G 5 F 2A 2 1 A B4
(1)Wireless output (code X) available in absolute measurement type (Code A) with only range 1-4, 316L SST isolating diaphragm material
(code 2), silicone fill fluid (code 1), and housing code (code P).
(2)3051TG lower range limit varies with atmospheric pressure.
(3)Wireless output (code X) only available in G 1/2 A DIN 16288 Male process connection (code 2C) with range 1-4, 316L SST isolating
diaphragm (code 2), silcone fill fluid (code 1), and housing code (code P).
(4)Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments.
Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for
sour refining environments.
(5)“Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
(6)Panel mounting bolts are not supplied.
Specifications and Reference Data
103
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
June 2012
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
(7)Not available with Alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all Cast Alloy C-276 flanges, all plated CS flanges, all DIN
flanges, all Level flanges, assemble-to manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3
and S4 codes), surface finish certification (Q16 code), and remote seal system report (QZ code).
(8)Not valid with Alternate Process Connection S5.
(9)Only available with Standard 3051. See specification section for more information.
104
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
A.5.4
Rosemount 3051CF Flowmeter Series
This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 3051CF configurations:
Configuration
Transmitter Output Code
4-20 mA HART®
-3051
-Enhanced 3051(1)
FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Profibus
(1)The enhanced 4-20 mA HART device can be ordered with Transmitter Output option code
A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7.
See Options for more details on each configuration.
Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter
Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Product Description
3051CFA
Annubar Flowmeter
Measurement Type
Standard
Differential Pressure
Standard
★
Liquid
Gas
Steam
Standard
★
★
★
2-in. (50 mm)
21/2-in. (63.5 mm)
3-in. (80 mm)
31/2-in. (89 mm)
4-in. (100 mm)
5-in. (125 mm)
6-in. (150 mm)
7-in. (175 mm)
8-in. (200 mm)
10-in. (250 mm)
12-in. (300 mm)
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Fluid Type
Standard
Line Size
Standard
020
025
030
035
040
050
060
070
080
100
120
Expanded
140
160
180
14-in. (350 mm)
16-in. (400 mm)
18-in. (450 mm)
Specifications and Reference Data
105
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Expanded
200
240
300
360
420
480
600
720
780
840
900
960
20-in. (500 mm)
24-in. (600 mm)
30-in. (750 mm)
36-in. (900 mm)
42-in. (1066 mm)
48-in. (1210 mm)
60-in. (1520 mm)
72-in. (1820 mm)
78-in (1950 mm)
84-in. (2100 mm)
90-in. (2250 mm)
96-in (2400 mm)
Pipe I.D. Range
Standard
Expanded
Range C from the Pipe I.D. table
Range D from the Pipe I.D. table
Standard
★
★
Range A from the Pipe I.D. table
Range B from the Pipe I.D. table
Range E from the Pipe I.D. table
Non-standard Pipe I.D. Range or Line Sizes greater than 12 inches
Pipe Material / Mounting Assembly Material
Standard
Expanded
Carbon steel (A105)
316 Stainless Steel
No Mounting (Customer Supplied)
Standard
★
★
★
Chrome-Moly Grade F-11
Chrome-Moly Grade F-22
Chrome-Moly Grade F-91
Piping Orientation
Standard
Horizontal Piping
Vertical Piping with Downwards Flow
Vertical Piping with Upwards Flow
Standard
★
★
★
Annubar Type
Standard
Expanded
106
Pak-Lok
Flanged with opposite side support
Standard
★
★
Flange-Lok
Gear-Drive Flo-Tap
Manual Flo-Tap
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Sensor Material
Standard
Expanded
Standard
★
316 Stainless Steel
Alloy C-276
Sensor Size
Standard
Standard
★
★
★
Sensor size 1 — Line sizes 2-in. (50 mm) to 8-in. (200 mm)
Sensor size 2 — Line sizes 6-in. (150 mm) to 96-in. (2400 mm)
Sensor size 3 — Line sizes greater than 12-in. (300 mm)
Mounting Type
Standard
T1
A1
A3
A6
D1
D3
D6
Expanded
A9(1)
AF(1)
AT(1)
R1
R3
R6
R9(1)
RF(1)
RT(1)
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Compression or Threaded Connection
150# RF ANSI
300# RF ANSI
600# RF ANSI
DN PN16 Flange
DN PN40 Flange
DN PN100 Flange
900# RF ANSI
1500# RF ANSI
2500 # RF ANSI
150# RTJ Flange
300# RTJ Flange
600# RTJ Flange
900# RTJ Flange
1500# RTJ Flange
2500# RTJ Flange
Opposite Side Support or Packing Gland
Standard
Expanded
No opposite side support or packing gland (Required for Pak-Lok and Flange-Lok models)
Opposite Side Support – Required for Flanged Models
NPT Threaded Opposite Support Assembly – Extended Tip
Welded Opposite Support Assembly – Extended Tip
Packing Gland – Required for Flo-Tap Models
Packing Gland Material
Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple
Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple
Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple
Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple
Alloy C-276 Packing Gland / Cage Nipple
Rod Material
Carbon Steel
Stainless Steel
Carbon Steel
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Standard
★
★
★
Packing Material
PTFE
PTFE
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Isolation Valve for Flo-Tap Models
Specifications and Reference Data
107
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Standard
Expanded
Standard
★
Not Applicable or Customer Supplied
Gate Valve, Carbon Steel
Gate Valve, Stainless Steel
Ball Valve, Carbon Steel
Ball Valve, Stainless Steel
Temperature Measurement
Standard
Expanded
Standard
★
★
Integral RTD – not available with Flanged model greater than class 600#
No Temperature Sensor
Remote Thermowell and RTD
Transmitter Connection Platform
Standard
Expanded
Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve Manifold– not available with Flanged model greater than class 600
Direct -mount, 5-valve Manifold – not available with Flanged model greater than class 600
Remote-mount NPT Connections (1/2-in. NPT)
Standard
★
★
★
Direct-mount, high temperature 5-valve Manifold – not available with Flanged model greater than
class 600
Remote-mount SW Connections (1/2-in.)
Differential Pressure Range
Standard
Standard
★
★
★
0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar)
0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar)
0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar)
Transmitter Output
Standard
Standard
★
Wireless
Transmitter Housing Material
Conduit Entry Size
Standard
No conduit entries
Standard
Engineered polymer
Transmitter Performance Class
Standard
Standard
★
1.6% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-yr. stability
Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)
Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol
Standard
WA3
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART
PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality
Standard
WP5
108
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Options (Include with selected model number)
Pressure Testing
Expanded
P1(2)
Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate
PX(2)
Extended Hydrostatic Testing
Special Cleaning
Expanded
P2
Cleaning for Special Services
PA
Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)
Material Testing
Expanded
V1
Dye Penetrant Exam
Material Examination
Expanded
V2
Radiographic Examination
Flow Calibration
Expanded
W1
Flow Calibration (Average K)
Special Inspection
Standard
QC1
Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate
QC7
Inspection & Performance Certificate
Surface Finish
Standard
RL
Surface finish for Low Pipe Reynolds # in Gas & Steam
RH
Surface finish for High Pipe Reynolds # in Liquid
Material Traceability Certification
Standard
Q8(3)
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10474:2004 3.1
Code Conformance(4)
Expanded
J2
ANSI/ASME B31.1
J3
ANSI/ASME B31.3
Materials Conformance
Expanded
J5(5)
NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156
Country Certification
Standard
J6
European Pressure Directive (PED)
Expanded
J1
Canadian Registration
Installed in Flanged Pipe Spool Section
Expanded
H3
150# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and Schedule
H4
300# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and Schedule
Specifications and Reference Data
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
109
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
H5
600# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and Schedule
Instrument Connections for Remote Mount Options
Standard
G2
Needle Valves, Stainless Steel
G6
OS&Y Gate Valve, Stainless Steel
Expanded
G1
Needle Valves, Carbon Steel
G3
Needle Valves, Alloy C-276
G5
OS&Y Gate Valve, Carbon Steel
G7
OS&Y Gate Valve, Alloy C-276
Special Shipment
Standard
Y1
Mounting Hardware Shipped Separately
Special Dimensions
Expanded
VM
Variable Mounting
VT
Variable Tip
VS
Variable length Spool Section
Product Certifications
Standard
I1
ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust
I2
INMETRO Intrinsic Safety
I3
China Intrinsic Safety
I5
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
I7
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring Options
Standard
L2
Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
Display and Interface Options
Standard
M5
LCD Display
Transmitter Calibration Certification
Standard
Q4
Calibration Certificate for Transmitter
Manifold for Remote Mount Option
Standard
F2
3-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel
F6
5-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel
Expanded
F1
3-Valve Manifold, Carbon Steel
F3
3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276
F5
5-Valve Manifold, Carbon Steel
F7
5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276
Configuration Buttons
Standard
DZ
Digital Zero Trim
110
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Typical Model
Number: 3051CFA
060
T1
(1)Available in remote mount applications only.
(2)Applies to assembled flowmeter only, mounting not tested.
(3)Instrument Connections for Remote Mount Options and Isolation Valves for Flo-tap Models are not included in the Material Traceability
Certification.
(4)Not available with Transmitter Connection Platform 6.
(5)Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments.
Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for
sour refining environments.
Specifications and Reference Data
111
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Additional Information
Rosemount 3051CFC
Compact Flowmeter
Dimensional Drawings: 3
Table 4. Rosemount 3051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Product Description
3051CFC
Compact Flowmeter
Measurement Type
Standard
Differential Pressure
Standard
★
Primary Element Technology
Standard
Conditioning Orifice Plate
Orifice Plate
Standard
★
★
Material Type
Standard
316 SST
Standard
★
Line Size
Standard
005(1)
010(1)
015(1)
020
030
040
060
080
100
120
/2-in. (15 mm)
1-in. (25 mm)
11/2-in. (40 mm)
2-in. (50 mm)
3-in. (80 mm)
4-in. (100 mm)
6-in. (150 mm)
8-in. (200 mm)
10-in. (250 mm)
12-in. (300 mm)
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Primary Element Style
Standard
Square Edged
Standard
★
Primary Element Type
Standard
040
065(2)
0.40 Beta Ratio
0.65 Beta Ratio
Standard
★
★
Temperature Measurement
Standard
Expanded
No Temperature Sensor
Standard
★
Remote Thermowell and RTD
Transmitter Connection Platform
Standard
112
Standard
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Table 4. Rosemount 3051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
★
★
Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve Manifold
Remote-mount, 1/4-in. NPT Connections
Differential Pressure Range
Standard
Standard
★
★
★
0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar)
0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar)
0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar)
Transmitter Output
Standard
Standard
★
Wireless
Transmitter Housing Material
Conduit Entry Size
Standard
No conduit entries
Engineered polymer
Standard
★
Transmitter Performance Class
Standard
Up to ±1.75% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-year stability
Standard
★
Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)
Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol
Standard
WA3
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART
PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality
Standard
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
Options (Include with selected model number)
Installation Accessories
Standard
AB
ANSI Alignment Ring (150#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes)
AC
ANSI Alignment Ring (300#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes)
AD
ANSI Alignment Ring (600#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes)
DG
DIN Alignment Ring (PN16)
DH
DIN Alignment Ring (PN40)
DJ
DIN Alignment Ring (PN100)
Expanded
JB
JIS Alignment Ring (10K)
JR
JIS Alignment Ring (20K)
JS
JIS Alignment Ring (40K)
Remote Adapters
Standard
FE
Flange Adapters 316 SST (1/2-in NPT)
High Temperature Application
Expanded
HT
Graphite Valve Packing (Tmax = 850 °F)
Flow Calibration
Expanded
WC(3)
Flow Calibration Certification (3 point)
WD(3)
Discharge Coefficient Verification (full 10 point)
Pressure Testing
Specifications and Reference Data
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
Standard
★
113
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 4. Rosemount 3051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Expanded
P1
Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate
Special Cleaning
Expanded
P2
Cleaning for Special Services
PA
Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)
Special Inspection
Standard
QC1
Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate
QC7
Inspection and Performance Certificate
Transmitter Calibration Certification
Standard
Q4
Calibration Certificate for Transmitter
Material Traceability Certification
Standard
Q8
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1
Code Conformance
Expanded
J2
ANSI/ASME B31.1
J3
ANSI/ASME B31.3
J4
ANSI/ASME B31.8
Materials Conformance
Expanded
J5(4)
NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156
Country Certification
Expanded
J1
Canadian Registration
Product Certifications
Standard
I1
ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust
I2
INMETRO Intrinsic Safety
I3
China Intrinsic Safety
I5
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
I7
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring Options
Standard
L2
Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
Display and Interface Options
Standard
M5
LCD Display
Manifold for Remote Mount Option
Standard
F2
3-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel
F6
5-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel
Configuration Buttons
Standard
DZ
Digitial Zero Trim
Typical Model Number:
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
3051CFC D C S 060 N 065 0 3 2 A A 1 WC E5 M5
(1)Not available for Primary Element Technology C.
(2)For 2-in. (50 mm) line sizes the Primary Element Type is 0.6 for Primary Element Technology Code C.
114
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
June 2012
(3)Not available with Primary Element Technology P.
(4)Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments.
Environmental limitsapply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for
sour refining environments.
Specifications and Reference Data
115
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Rosemount 3051CFP
Integral
Orifice Flowmeter
Additional Information
Dimensional Drawings: page 93
Table 5. Rosemount 3051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Product Description
3051CFP
Integral Orifice Flowmeter
Measurement Type
Standard
Differential Pressure
Standard
★
Body Material
Standard
316 SST
Standard
★
Line Size
Standard
005
010
015
/2-in. (15 mm)
1-in. (25 mm)
11/2-in. (40 mm)
Standard
★
★
★
Process Connection
Standard
T1
S1(1)
P1
P2
D1
D2
D3
W1
W3
W6
Expanded
A1
A3
A6
R1
R3
R6
NPT Female Body (Not Available with Remote Thermowell and RTD)
Socket Weld Body (Not Available with Remote Thermowell and RTD)
Pipe Ends: NPT Threaded
Pipe ends: Beveled
Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN16, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN40, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN100, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, weld-neck
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, weld-neck
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, weld-neck
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 150, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 300, slip-on
Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 600, slip-on
Orifice Plate Material
Standard
116
Standard
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 5. Rosemount 3051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Expanded
316 SST
★
Alloy C-276
Alloy 400
Bore Size Option
Standard
0066
0109
0160
0196
0260
0340
0150
0250
0345
0500
0630
0800
0295
0376
0512
0748
1022
1184
Expanded
0010
0014
0020
0034
0.066-in. (1.68 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.109-in. (2.77 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.160-in. (4.06 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.196-in. (4.98 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.260-in. (6.60 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.340-in. (8.64 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.150-in. (3.81 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
0.250-in. (6.35 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
0.345-in. (8.76 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
0.500-in. (12.70 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
0.630-in. (16.00 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
0.800-in. (20.32 mm) for 1-in. Pipe
0.295-in. (7.49 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
0.376-in. (9.55 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
0.512-in. (13.00 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
0.748-in. (19.00 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
1.022-in. (25.96 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
1.184-in. (30.07 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
0.010-in. (0.25 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.014-in. (0.36 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.020-in. (0.51 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
0.034-in. (0.86 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe
Transmitter Connection Platform
Standard
D3
D5
R3
R5
Expanded
D4
D6
D7
R4
R6
Direct-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, SST
Direct-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, SST
Remote-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, SST
Remote-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, SST
Standard
★
★
★
★
Direct-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276
Direct-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276
Direct-mount, High Temperature, 5-Valve Manifold, SST
Remote-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276
Remote-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276
Differential Pressure Ranges
Standard
0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar)
0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar)
Specifications and Reference Data
Standard
★
★
117
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 5. Rosemount 3051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
★
0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar)
Transmitter Output
Standard
Wireless
Transmitter Housing Material
Standard
Standard
★
Engineered polymer
Conduit Entry Size
No conduit entries
Standard
★
Transmitter Performance Class
Standard
Standard
★
up to ±1.75% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-year stability
Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)
Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol
Standard
WA3
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART
PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality
Standard
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
Options (Include with selected model number)
Transmitter Body / Bolt Material
Expanded
GT
High Temperature (850 °F / 454 °C)
Temperature Sensor
Expanded
RT(2)
Thermowell and RTD
Optional Connection
Standard
G1
DIN 19213 Transmitter Connection
Pressure Testing
Expanded
P1(3)
Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate
Special Cleaning
Expanded
P2
Cleaning for Special Services
PA
Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4)
Material Testing
Expanded
V1
Dye Penetrant Exam
Material Examination
Expanded
V2
Radiographic Examination
Flow Calibration
Expanded
WD(4)
Discharge Coefficient Verification
118
Standard
★
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Table 5. Rosemount 3051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Special Inspection
Standard
QC1
Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate
QC7
Inspection and Performance Certificate
Material Traceability Certification
Standard
Q8
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1
Code Conformance
Expanded
J2(5)
ANSI/ASME B31.1
J3(5)
ANSI/ASME B31.3
J4(5)
ANSI/ASME B31.8
Materials Conformance
Expanded
J5(6)
NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156
Country Certification
Standard
J6
European Pressure Directive (PED)
Expanded
J1
Canadian Registration
Transmitter Calibration Certification
Standard
Q4
Calibration Certificate for Transmitter
Product Certifications
Standard
I1
ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust
I2
INMETRO Intrinsic Safety
I3
China Intrinsic Safety
I5
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
I7
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring Options
Standard
L2
Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring
Display and Interface Options
Standard
M5
LCD Display
Configuration Buttons
Standard
DZ
Digital Zero Trim
Typical Model Number:
Standard
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
Standard
★
3051CFP D S 010 W1 S 0500 D3 2 A A 1 E5 M5
(1)To improve pipe perpendicularity for gasket sealing, socket diameter is smaller than standard pipe O.D.
(2)Thermowell Material is the same as the body material.
(3)Does not apply to Process Connection codes T1 and S1.
(4)Not available for bore sizes 0010, 0014, 0020, or 0034.
(5)Not available with DIN Process Connection codes D1, D2, or D3.
Specifications and Reference Data
119
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
June 2012
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
(6)Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments.
Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour
refining environments.
120
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
A.5.5
Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter
This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 3051L
configurations:
Configuration
Transmitter Output Code
4-20 mA HART®
-3051
-Enhanced 3051(1)
FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Profibus
(1)The enhanced 4-20 mA HART device can be ordered with Transmitter Output option code
A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7.
3051L Level Transmitter
See Options for more details on each configuration.
Additional Information
Dimensional Drawings: page 93
Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model
Transmitter Type
3051L
Level Transmitter
Pressure Range
Standard
Standard
★
★
★
–250 to 250 inH2O (–0,6 to 0,6 bar)
–1000 to 1000 inH2O (–2,5 to 2,5 bar)
–300 to 300 psi (–20,7 to 20,7 bar)
Transmitter Output
Standard
Standard
★
Wireless
Process Connection Size, Material, Extension length (High Side)
Standard
Code
Standard
Process Connection Size
Material
Extension Length
G0
H0(1)
J0
A0(1)
A2(1)
2-in./DN 50/A
2-in./DN 50
2-in./DN 50
3-in./DN 80
3-in./DN 80
316L SST
Alloy C-276
Tantalum
316L SST
316L SST
Flush Mount Only
Flush Mount Only
Flush Mount Only
Flush Mount
2-in./50 mm
★
★
★
★
★
A4(1)
Standard
3-in./DN 80
316L SST
4-in./100 mm
★
Code
(1)
Standard
Process Connection Size
Material
Extension Length
(1)
A6
B0(1)
3-in./DN 80
4-in./DN 100
316L SST
316L SST
6-in./150 mm
Flush Mount
★
★
B2(1)
4-in./DN 100
316L SST
2-in./50 mm
★
Specifications and Reference Data
121
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
B4(1)
B6(1)
C0(1)
C2(1)
C4(1)
C6(1)
D0(1)
D2(1)
D4(1)
D6(1)
E0
F0
4-in./DN 100
4-in./DN 100
3-in./DN 80
3-in./DN 80
3-in./DN 80
3-in./DN 80
4-in./DN 100
4-in./DN 100
4-in./DN 100
4-in./DN 100
3-in./DN 80
4-in./DN 100
316L SST
316L SST
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
Tantalum
Tantalum
4-in./100 mm
6-in./150 mm
Flush Mount
2-in./50 mm
4-in./100 mm
6-in./150 mm
Flush Mount
2-in./50 mm
4-in./100 mm
6-in./150 mm
Flush Mount Only
Flush Mount Only
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Mounting Flange Size, Rating, Material (High Side)
Size
Rating
Material
Standard
Standard
X(1)
F(1)
G(1)
Y(1)
H(1)
J(1)
Z(1)
L(1)
K(1)
T(1)
2-in.
3-in.
4-in.
2-in.
3-in.
4-in.
2-in.
3-in.
2-in.
3-in.
4-in.
2-in.
3-in.
4-in.
2-in.
3-in.
DN 50
DN 80
DN 100
DN 100
DN 50
DN 80
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600
PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1
PN 40 per EN 1092-1
PN 40 per EN 1092-1
PN 10/16 per EN 1092-1
PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1
PN 40 per EN 1092-1
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
SST
SST
SST
SST
SST
SST
SST
SST
CS
CS
CS
CS
SST
SST
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
U(1)
W(1)
7(1)
Expanded
DN 100
DN 100
4 in.
PN 40 per EN 1092-1
PN 10/16 per EN 1092-1
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600
SST
SST
SST
★
★
★
—
—
—
10K per JIS B2238
20K per JIS B2238
40K per JIS B2238
CS
CS
CS
122
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
4(1)
5(1)
6(1)
—
—
—
10K per JIS B2238
20K per JIS B2238
40K per JIS B2238
316 SST
316 SST
316 SST
Seal Fill Fluid (High Side)
Specific Gravity
Temperature Limits (Ambient Temperature of
70° F (21° C))
Standard
Standard
Syltherm XLT
Silicone 704
Silicone 200
Inert (Halocarbon)
Glycerine and
Water
Neobee M-20
Propylene Glycol
and Water
0.85
1.07
0.93
1.85
1.13
-102 to 293 °F (-75 to 145 °C)
32 to 401 °F (0 to 205 °C)
-49 to 401 °F (-45 to 205 °C)
-49 to 320 °F (-45 to 160 °C)
5 to 203 °F (-15 to 95 °C)
★
★
★
★
★
0.92
1.02
5 to 401 °F (-15 to 205 °C)
5 to 203 F (-15 to 95 °C)
★
★
Low Pressure Side
Configuration
Flange
Adapter
Diaphragm Material
Sensor Fill Fluid
Standard
(1)
11
21(1)
22(1)
2A(1)
2B(1)
31(1)
Standard
Gage
Differential
Differential
Differential
Differential
Tuned-System
Assembly with
Remote Seal
SST
SST
SST
SST
SST
None
316L SST
316L SST
Alloy C-276
316L SST
Alloy C-276
316L SST
Silicone
Silicone
Silicone
Inert (Halocarbon)
Inert (Halocarbon)
Silicone
(Requires Option Code S1)
★
★
★
★
★
★
O-ring
Standard
Standard
★
Glass-filled PTFE
Housing Material
Standard
Conduit Entry Size
No conduit entries
Engineered polymer
Standard
★
Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P)
Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol
Standard
WA3
User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART
Standard
★
Antenna and SmartPower
Standard
WP5
Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately)
Standard
★
Options (Include with selected model number)
Seal Assemblies
Specifications and Reference Data
123
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Standard
(2)
S1
Standard
★
Assembled to One Rosemount 1199 Seal (Requires 1199M)
Product Certifications
Standard
I1
I2
I3
I5
I7
Standard
★
★
★
★
★
ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust
INMETRO Intrinsic Safety
China Intrinsic Safety
FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
Bolting Material
Standard
L4
L5
L6
L8
Standard
★
★
★
★
Austenitic 316 SST Bolts
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M bolts
Alloy K-500 Bolts
ASTM A 193 Class 2, Grade B8M Bolts
Display and Interface Options
Standard
M5
Standard
★
LCD Display
Calibration Certification
Standard
Q4
QP
QG
Standard
★
★
★
Calibration Certificate
Calibration Certificate and tamper evident seal
Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate
Material Traceability Certification
Standard
Q8
Standard
★
Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1
Toolkit Total System Performance Reports
Standard
QZ
Standard
★
Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report
Configuration Buttons
Standard
DZ
Standard
★
Digital Zero Trim
Lower Housing Flushing Connection Options
Ring Material
Number
Size (NPT)
Standard
F1
F2
F3
F4
F7
124
Standard
316 SST
316 SST
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
316 SST
/4-18 NPT
/4-18 NPT
/4-18 NPT
/4-18 NPT
/2-14 NPT
★
★
★
★
★
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time.
F8
F9
F0
316 SST
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276
/2-14 NPT
/2-14 NPT
/2-14 NPT
★
★
★
Typical Model Number: 3051L 2 A A0 D 21 A A F1
(1)Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements highlighted within NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field
production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also
conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(2)“Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
Specifications and Reference Data
125
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
A.6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Options
Standard configuration
Unless otherwise specified, transmitter is shipped as follows:
Engineering units
Differential/Gage:
Absolute/3051TA:
Low Limit:
High Limit:
Output:
Flange type:
Flange material:
O-ring material:
Drain/vent:
LCD Display:
Alarm:
Software tag:
inH2O (Range 0, 1, 2, and 3)
psi (Range 4 and 5)
psi (all ranges)
0 (engineering units above)
Upper range limit
Linear
Specified model code option
Specified model code option
Specified model code option
Specified model code option
Installed or none
High
(Blank)
Custom configuration
If Option Code C1 is ordered, the customer may specify the following data in addition to the
standard configuration parameters.
Output Information
Transmitter Information
LCD Display Configuration
Hardware Selectable Information
Signal Selection
Refer to the “Rosemount Enhanced 3051 Configuration Data Sheet” document number
00806-0100-4007.
Tagging (3 options available)
Standard SST hardware tag is wired to the transmitter. Tag character height is 0.125 in.
(3,18 mm), 56 characters maximum.
Tag may be permanently stamped on transmitter nameplate upon request, 56
characters maximum.
Tag may be stored in transmitter memory. Character limit is dependent on protocol.
–- WirelessHART: 32 characters
Optional Rosemount 304, 305, or 306 Integral Manifolds
Factory assembled to 3051C and 3051T transmitters. Refer to the following Product Data Sheet
(document number 00813-0100-4839 for Rosemount 304 and 00813-0100-4733 for
Rosemount 305 and 306) for additional information.
126
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Other seals
Refer to Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4016 for additional information.
Output information
Output range points must be the same unit of measure. Available units of measure include:
Pressure
atm
mbar
bar
inH20
inHg
hPa
mHg@0 °C
inH2O@4 °C
mmH2O
mmHg
mmH2O@4 °C
ftH20
inH20@60 °F
Psf
g/cm2
kg/cm2
Pa
kPa
MPa
kg/SqM
ftH2O@4 °C
psi
torr
cmH20@4 °C
cmHG@0 °C
ftH20@60 °F
mH20@4 °C
Display and interface options
Digital display option provides diagnostic messages for local troubleshooting and has 90 degree
rotation capability for easy viewing.
M5
Digital Display
2-Line, 5-Digit LCD for 4-20 mA HART
Configuration buttons
The 3051 Wireless transmitter comes with a Digital Zero installed with the LCD digital display.
Bolts for flanges and adapters
Options permit bolts for flanges and adapters to be obtained in various materials
Standard material is plated carbon steel per ASTM A449, Type 1
Specifications and Reference Data
127
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
L4
Austenitic 316 Stainless Steel Bolts
L5
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Bolts
L6
Alloy K-500 Bolts
Rosemount 3051C Coplanar Flange and 3051T bracket option
B4
Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting
For use with the standard Coplanar
flange configuration
Bracket for mounting of transmitter on 2-in. pipe or panel
Stainless steel construction with stainless steel bolts
Rosemount 3051C Traditional Flange bracket options
B1
For use with the traditional flange option
Bracket for mounting on 2-in. pipe
Carbon steel construction with carbon
steel bolts
Coated with polyurethane paint
B2
Bracket for Panel Mounting
For use with the traditional flange option
Bracket for mounting transmitter on wall
or panel
Carbon steel construction with carbon
steel bolts
Coated with polyurethane paint
B3
Flat Bracket for 2-in. Pipe Mounting
For use with the traditional flange option
Bracket for vertical mounting of transmitter on 2-in. pipe
Carbon steel construction with carbon
steel bolts
Coated with polyurethane paint
B7
B8
B9
128
Bracket for 2-in. Pipe Mounting
B1 Bracket with SST Bolts
Same bracket as the B1 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts
B2 Bracket with SST Bolts
Same bracket as the B2 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts
B3 Bracket with SST Bolts
Same bracket as the B3 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
BA
Stainless Steel B1 Bracket with SST Bolts
B1 bracket in stainless steel with Series 300 stainless steel bolts
BC
Stainless Steel B3 Bracket with SST Bolts
B3 bracket in stainless steel with Series 300 stainless steel bolts
Shipping weights
Table 7. Transmitter weights without options
Transmitter
Add weight In lb (kg)
3051C
3.9 (1,8)
3051L
Table 8
3051T
2.3 (1,0)
Table 8. 3051L weights without options
Flange
Flush
lb. (kg)
2-in. Ext.
lb (kg)
4-in. Ext.
lb (kg)
6-in. Ext.
lb (kg)
2-in., 150
12.5 (5,7)
—
—
—
3-in., 150
17.5 (7,9)
19.5 (8,8)
20.5 (9,3)
21.5 (9,7)
4-in., 150
23.5 (10,7)
26.5 (12,0)
28.5 (12,9)
30.5 (13,8)
2-in., 300
17.5 (7,9)
—
—
—
3-in., 300
22.5 (10,2)
24.5 (11,1)
25.5 (11,6)
26.5 (12,0)
4-in., 300
32.5 (14,7)
35.5 (16,1)
37.5 (17,0)
39.5 (17,9)
2-in., 600
15.3 (6,9)
—
—
—
3-in., 600
25.2 (11,4)
27.2 (12,3)
28.2 (12,8)
29.2 (13,2)
DN 50/PN 40
13.8 (6,2)
—
—
—
DN 80/PN 40
19.5 (8,8)
21.5 (9,7)
22.5 (10,2)
23.5 (10,6)
DN 100/PN 10/16
17.8 (8,1)
19.8 (9,0)
20.8 (9,5)
21.8 (9,9)
DN 100/PN 40
23.2 (10,5)
25.2 (11,5)
26.2 (11,9)
27.2 (12,3)
Specifications and Reference Data
129
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Table 9. Transmitter options weights
Code
130
Option
Add
lb (kg)
J, K, L, M
Stainless Steel Housing(T)
3.9 (1,8)
J, K, L, M
Stainless Steel Housing (C, L, H, P)
3.1 (1,4)
M5
LCD Display for Aluminum Housing
0.5 (0,2)
M6
LCD Display for SST Housing
1.25 (0,6)
B4
SST Mounting Bracket for Coplanar Flange
1.0 (0,5)
B1 B2 B3
Mounting Bracket for Traditional Flange
2.3 (1,0)
B7 B8 B9
Mounting Bracket for Traditional Flange
2.3 (1,0)
BA, BC
SST Bracket for Traditional Flange
2.3 (1,0)
H2
Traditional Flange
2.4 (1,1)
H3
Traditional Flange
2.7 (1,2)
H4
Traditional Flange
2.6 (1,2)
H7
Traditional Flange
2.5 (1,1)
FC
Level Flange—3 in., 150
10.8 (4,9)
FD
Level Flange—3 in., 300
14.3 (6,5)
FA
Level Flange—2 in., 150
10.7 (4,8)
FB
Level Flange—2 in., 300
14.0 (6,3)
FP
DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 50, PN 40
8.3 (3,8)
FQ
DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 80, PN 40
13.7 (6,2)
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
A.7
Spare parts
Silicone Fill
Model 3051C Sensor Modules (Min. Span/Range)
Part Number
Note: One spare part is recommended for every 50 transmitters.
Note: Listed by Range and Process Isolator Order Numbers.
–3 to 3/0.1 inH2O, Range 0 (includes Traditional SST flange and SST bolts).
316L SST
03031-1045-0002
–25 to 25 inH2O/0.5 inH2O, Range 1
316L SST
03031-1045-0012
Alloy C-276
03031-1045-0013
Alloy 400
03031-1045-0014
Gold-plated Alloy 400
03031-1045-0016
Gold-plated 316 SST
03031-1045-0017
–250 to 250 inH2O/2.5 inH2O, Range 2
316L SST
03031-1045-0022
Alloy C-276
03031-1045-0023
Alloy 400
03031-1045-0024
Tantalum
03031-1045-0025
Gold-plated Alloy 400
03031-1045-0026
Gold-plated 316 SST
03031-1045-0027
–1000 to 1000 inH2O/10 inH2O, Range 3
316L SST
03031-1045-0032
Alloy C-276
03031-1045-0033
Alloy 400
03031-1045-0034
Tantalum
03031-1045-0035
Gold-plated Alloy 400
03031-1045-0036
Gold-plated 316 SST
03031-1045-0037
–300 to 300 psi/3 psi, Range 4
316L SST
03031-1045-2042
Alloy C-276
03031-1045-2043
Alloy 400
03031-1045-2044
Tantalum
03031-1045-2045
Gold-plated Alloy 400
03031-1045-2046
Gold-plated 316 SST
03031-1045-2047
Specifications and Reference Data
131
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
–2000 to 2000/20 psi, Range 5
316L SST
03031-1045-2052
Alloy C-276
03031-1045-2053
Alloy 400
03031-1045-2054
Tantalum
03031-1045-2055
Gold-plated Alloy 400
03031-1045-2056
Gold-plated 316 SST
03031-1045-2057
Silicone fill
Rosemount 3051C gage and differential sensor modules (Min. Span/Range)
Part number
Note: One spare part is recommended for every 50 transmitters.
Note: Listed by Range and Process Isolator Order Numbers.
Range 1
Gage pressure range
Differential pressure range
–25 to 25 in H2O/0.5 in H2O
–25 to 25 in H2O/0.5 in H2O
316L SST
03031-1045-0012
Alloy C-276
03031-1045-0013
Alloy 400
03031-1045-0014
Gold-plated Alloy 400
03031-1045-0016
Gold-plated 316 SST
03031-1045-0017
Range 2
–250 to 250 inH2O/2.5 inH2O
–250 to 250 inH2O/2.5 inH2O
316L SST
03031-1045-0022
Alloy C-276
03031-1045-0023
Alloy 400
03031-1045-0024
Tantalum
03031-1045-0025
Gold-plated Alloy 400
03031-1045-0026
Gold-plated 316 SST
03031-1045-0027
Range 3
–407 to 1000 inH2O/10 inH2O
-1000 to 1000 inH2O/10 inH2O
316L SST
03031-1045-0032
Alloy C-276
03031-1045-0033
Alloy 400
03031-1045-0034
Tantalum
03031-1045-0035
Gold-plated Alloy 400
03031-1045-0036
Gold-plated 316 SST
03031-1045-0037
132
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Range 4
–14.2 to 300 psi/3 psi
-300 to 300 psi/3 psi
316L SST
03031-1045-2042
Alloy C-276
03031-1045-2043
Alloy 400
03031-1045-2044
Tantalum
03031-1045-2045
Gold-plated Alloy 400
03031-1045-2046
Gold-plated 316 SST
03031-1045-2047
Range 5
–14.2 to 2000 psi/20 psi
-2000 to 2000psi/20 psi
316L SST
03031-1045-2052
Alloy C-276
03031-1045-2053
Alloy 400
03031-1045-2054
Tantalum
03031-1045-2055
Gold-plated Alloy 400
03031-1045-2056
Gold-plated 316 SST
03031-1045-2057
Silicone fill
Rosemount 3051C absolute sensor modules (Min. Span/Range)
Part number
Note: One spare part is recommended for every 50 transmitters.
Note: Listed by Range and Process Isolator Order Numbers.
Range 1, 0 to 30 psia/0.3 psia
316L SST
03031-2020-0012
Alloy C-276
03031-2020-0013
Alloy 400
03031-2020-0014
Gold-plated Alloy 400
03031-2020-0016
Gold-plated 316 SST
03031-2020-0017
Range 2, 0 to 150/1.5 psia
316L SST
03031-2020-0022
Alloy C-276
03031-2020-0023
Alloy 400
03031-2020-0024
Gold-plated Alloy 400
03031-2020-0026
Gold-plated 316 SST
03031-2020-0027
Range 3, 0 to 800 psia/8 psia
316L SST
03031-2020-0032
Alloy C-276
03031-2020-0033
Alloy 400
03031-2020-0034
Gold-plated Alloy 400
03031-2020-0036
Gold-plated 316 SST
03031-2020-0037
Specifications and Reference Data
133
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Range 4, 0 to 400 psia/40 psia
316L SST
03031-2020-0042
Alloy C-276
03031-2020-0043
Alloy 400
03031-2020-0044
Gold-plated Alloy 400
03031-2020-0046
Gold-plated 316 SST
03031-2020-0047
Silicone Fill
Rosemount 3051T Sensor Modules (Min. Span/Range)
Part Number
Note: One spare part is recommended for every 50 transmitters.
Gage pressure range
Range 1
0-0.3/30 psig
Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator
/4 –18 NPT Female
03031-3112-3112
/2 –14 NPT Female
03031-3102-3112
G /2 A DIN 16288 Male
03031-3132-3112
Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator
03031-3112-3113
03031-3102-3113
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, 316L SST Isolator
03031-3111-3112
03031-3101-3112
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator
03031-3111-3113
03031-3101-3113
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
Range 2
0-1.5/150 psig
Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
G /2 A DIN 16288 Male
03031-3112-3122
03031-3102-3122
03031-3132-3122
Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
G /2 A DIN 16288 Male
134
03031-3112-3122
03031-3102-3122
03031-3132-3122
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator
03031-3112-3123
03031-3102-3123
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, 316L SST Isolator
¼ –18 NPT Female
03031-3111-3122
03031-3101-3122
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator
03031-3111-3123
03031-3101-3123
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
Range 3
0-8/800 psig
Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator
/4 –18 NPT Female
03031-3112-3132
/2 –14 NPT Female
03031-3102-3132
G /2 A DIN 16288 Male
03031-3132-3132
Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator
03031-3112-3133
03031-3102-3133
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, 316L SST Isolator
03031-3111-3132
03031-3101-3132
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator
03031-3111-3133
03031-3101-3133
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
Range4
0-40/4,000 psig
Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
G /2 A DIN 16288 Male
03031-3112-3142
03031-3102-3142
03031-3132-3142
Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator
03031-3112-3143
03031-3102-3143
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, 316L SST Isolator
03031-3111-3142
03031-3101-3142
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator
03031-3111-3143
03031-3101-3143
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
Specifications and Reference Data
135
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Gage pressure range
Range 1
0-0.3/30 psia
Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator
/4 –18 NPT Female
03031-3112-3012
/2 –14 NPT Female
03031-3102-1012
G /2 A DIN 16288 Male
03031-3132-3012
Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator
03031-3112-3013
03031-3102-3013
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, 316L SST Isolator
03031-3111-3012
03031-3101-3012
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator
03031-3111-3013
03031-3101-3013
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
Range 2
0-1.5/150 psia
Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator
/4 –18 NPT Female
03031-3112-3022
/2 –14 NPT Female
03031-3112-3022
G /2 A DIN 16288 Male
03031-3132-3022
Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator
03031-3112-3023
03031-3102-3023
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, 316L SST Isolator
03031-3111-3022
03031-3101-3022
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator
03031-3111-3023
03031-3101-3023
/4–18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
Range 3
0-8/800 psia
Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator
/4–18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
G /2 A DIN 16288 Male
03031-3112-3032
03031-3102-3032
03031-3132-3032
Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator
03031-3112-3033
03031-3102-3033
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
136
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
SST, 316L SST Isolator
03031-3111-3032
03031-3101-3032
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator
/4 –18 NPT Female
03031-3111-3033
03031-3101-3033
/2 –14 NPT Female
Range 4
0-40/4,000 psia
Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator
03031-3112-3042
03031-3102-3042
G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male
03031-3132-3042
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator
03031-3112-3043
03031-3102-3043
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, 316L SST Isolator
03031-3111-3042
03031-3101-3042
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator
/4 –18 NPT Female
03031-3111-3043
/2 –14 NPT Female
03031-3101-3043
Range 5
0-2000/10,000 psia
Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator
03031-3112-3052
03031-3102-3052
Autoclave type F-250-C
03031-3122-3052
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator
03031-3112-3053
03031-3102-3053
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, 316L SST Isolator
03031-3111-3052
03031-3101-3052
Autoclave type F-250-C
03031-3121-3052
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator
03031-3111-3053
03031-3101-3053
/4 –18 NPT Female
/2 –14 NPT Female
Specifications and Reference Data
137
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
LCD Display
Part number
LCD Display for 3051 Wireless with Polymer Housing
LCD Display for 3051 WirelessHART
03151-9010-0001
Electrical housings
Part number
Housing covers (include o-ring)
Part number
Standard - Polymer
Engineered Polymer
Wireless Battery Cover - Polymer
LCD Display Cover - Polymer
Flanges
Part number
Differential Coplanar Flange
316 SST
03031-0388-0022
Cast Alloy C-276
03031-0388-0023
Cast Alloy 400
03031-0388-0024
Nickel-plated carbon steel
03031-0388-0025
Gage/Absolute Coplanar Flange
316 SST
03031-0388-1022
Cast Alloy C-276
03031-0388-1023
Cast Alloy 400
03031-0388-1024
Nickel-plated carbon steel
03031-0388-1025
Coplanar flange alignment screw (package of 12)
03031-0309-0001
Traditional Flange
316 SST
03031-0320-0002
Cast Alloy C-276
03031-0320-0003
Cast Alloy 400
03031-0320-0004
316 SST - DIN Compliant (Option Code HJ)
03031-1350-0012
Level Flange, Vertical Mount
2 in., class 150, SST
03031-0393-0221
2 in., class 300, SST
03031-0393-0222
3 in., class 150, SST
03031-0393-0231
3 in., class 300, SST
03031-0393-0232
DIN, DN 50, PN 40
03031-0393-1002
DIN, DN 80, PN 40
03031-0393-1012
138
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Flange adapter kits (each kit contains parts for one DP transmitter or two GP/AP
transmitters)
Part number
CS bolts, glass-filled PTFE O-Rings
SST adapters
03031-1300-0002
Cast Alloy C-276 adapters
03031-1300-0003
Alloy 400 adapters
03031-1300-0004
Nickel-plated carbon steel adapters
03031-1300-0005
SST bolts, glass-filled PTFE O-Rings
SST adapters
03031-1300-0012
Cast Alloy C-276 adapters
03031-1300-0013
Alloy 400 adapters
03031-1300-0014
Nickel-plated carbon steel adapters
03031-1300-0015
CS bolts, graphite-filled PTFE O-Rings
SST adapters
03031-1300-0102
Cast Alloy C-276 adapters
03031-1300-0103
Alloy 400 adapters
03031-1300-0104
Nickel-plated carbon steel adapters
03031-1300-0105
SST bolts, graphite-filled PTFE O-Rings
SST adapters
03031-1300-0112
Cast Alloy C-276 adapters
03031-1300-0113
Alloy 400 adapters
03031-1300-0114
Nickel-plated carbon steel adapters
03031-1300-0115
Flange adapters
Part number
/2 - 14 NPT Adapters
316 SST
02024-0069-0002
Cast Alloy C-276
02024-0069-0003
Cast Alloy 400
02024-0069-0004
Nickel-plated carbon steel
02024-0069-0005
Socket Weld Adapters
316 SST
02024-0069-1002
Cast Alloy C-276
02024-0069-1003
Cast Alloy 400
02024-0069-1004
Specifications and Reference Data
139
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
O-Ring packages (package of 12)
Part number
Electronics housing, cover
03031-0232-0001
Electronics housing, module
03031-0233-0001
Process flange, glass-filled PTFE (White)
03031-0234-0001
Process flange, graphite-filled PTFE (Black)
03031-0234-0002
Flange adapter, glass-filled PTFE (Light Brown)
03031-0242-0001
Flange adapter, graphite-filled PTFE (Black)
03031-0242-0002
Bolt kits
Part number
COPLANAR FLANGE
Flange Bolt Kit {44mm (1.75 in.)} (set of 4)
Carbon steel
03031-0312-0001
316 SST
03031-0312-0002
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M
03031-0312-0003
Alloy K-500
03031-0312-0004
Flange/Adapter Bolt Kit {73mm (2.88 in.)} (set of 4)
Carbon steel
03031-0306-0001
316 SST
03031-0306-0002
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M
03031-0306-0003
Alloy K-500
03031-0306-0004
TRADITIONAL FLANGE
Differential Flange/Adapter Bolt Kit {44mm (1.75 in.)} (set of 8)
Carbon steel
03031-0307-0001
316 SST
03031-0307-0002
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M
03031-0307-0003
Alloy K-500
03031-0307-0004
Gage/Absolute Flange/Adapter Bolt Kit {44mm (1.75 in.)} (set of 6)
Carbon steel
03031-0307-1001
316 SST
03031-0307-1002
ASTM A 193, Grade B7M
03031-0307-1003
Alloy K-500
03031-0307-1004
Conventional Manifold/Traditional Flange Bolts
Carbon steel
Use bolts supplied with
manifold
316 SST
Use bolts supplied with
manifold
Level Flange, Vertical Mount Bolt Kit (Set of 4)
Carbon steel
03031-0395-0001
316 SST
03031-0395-0002
140
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Drain/Vent valve kits (each kit contains parts for one transmitter)
Part number
Differential Drain/Vent Kits
316 SST stem and seat kit
01151-0028-0022
Alloy C-276 stem and seat kit
01151-0028-0023
Alloy K-500 stem and Alloy 400 seat kit
01151-0028-0024
316 SST ceramic ball drain/vent kit
03031-0378-0022
Alloy C-276 ceramic ball drain/vent kit
03031-0378-0023
Alloy 400/K-500 ceramic ball drain/vent kit
03031-0378-0024
Gage/Absolute Drain/Vent Kits
316 SST stem and seat kit
01151-0028-0012
Alloy C-276 stem and seat kit
01151-0028-0013
Alloy K-500 stem and Alloy 400 seat kit
01151-0028-0014
316 SST ceramic ball drain/vent kit
03031-0378-0012
Alloy C-276 ceramic ball drain/vent kit
03031-0378-0013
Alloy 400/K-500 ceramic ball drain/vent kit
03031-0378-0014
Mounting brackets
Part number
3051C and 3051L Coplanar Flange Bracket kit
B4 bracket, SST, 2-in. pipe mount, SST bolts
03031-0189-0003
3051T Inline Bracket Kit
B4 bracket, SST, 2-in. pipe mount, SST bolts
03031-0189-0004
3051C Traditional Flange Bracket Kits
B1 bracket, 2-in. pipe mount, CS bolts
03031-0313-0001
B2 bracket, panel mount, CS bolts
03031-0313-0002
B3 flat bracket, 2-in. pipe mount, CS bolts
03031-0313-0003
B7 (B1 bracket, SST bolts)
03031-0313-0007
B8 (B2 bracket, SST bolts)
03031-0313-0008
B9 (B3 bracket, SST bolts)
03031-0313-0009
BA (SST B1 bracket, SST bolts)
03031-0313-0011
BC (SST B3 bracket, SST bolts)
03031-0313-0013
Specifications and Reference Data
141
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
June 2012
142
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
Appendix B
Product Certifications
Wireless Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 143
B.1
Wireless Certifications
B.1.1
Approved manufacturing locations
Rosemount Inc. — Chanhassen, Minnesota USA
Fisher-Rosemount GmbH & Co. — Wessling, Germany
Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Private Limited — Singapore
Beijing Rosemount Far East Instrument Co., LTD — Beijing, China
B.1.2
European directive information
The EC declaration of conformity can be found on . The most recent revision can be found at
www.rosemount.com.
B.1.3
Telecommunication compliance
All wireless devices require certification to ensure that they adhere to regulations regarding the
use of the RF spectrum. Nearly every country requires this type of product certification.
Emerson is working with governmental agencies around the world to supply fully compliant
products and remove the risk of violating country directives or laws governing wireless device
usage.
B.1.4
FCC and IC
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
conditions: This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device
must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 20 cm from all persons.
B.1.5
Ordinary location certification for FM
As standard, the transmitter has been examined and tested to determine that the design meets
basic electrical, mechanical, and fire protection requirements by FM, a nationally recognized
testing laboratory (NRTL) as accredited by the Federal Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA).
Product Certifications
143
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Product Certifications
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
B.1.6
North American certifications
Factory Mutual (FM) approvals
I5
B.1.7
CSA - Canadian Standards Association
I6
B.1.8
FM Intrinsically Safe, Non-Incendive, and Dust Ignition-proof.
Intrinsically Safe for Class I/II/III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G.
Zone Marking: Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia llC
Temperature Codes T4 (Tamb = -50 to 70 °C)
Non-Incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D.
Dust Ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G.
Ambient temperature limits: -50 to 85 °C
For use with Rosemount power module P/N 00753-9220-0001 only.
Enclosure Type 4X / IP66/68
CSA Intrinsically Safe
Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D.
Temp Code T3C
Enclosure Type 4X / IP66/68
For use with Rosemount power module P/N 00753-9220-0001 only.
European certifications
I1
ATEX Intrinsic Safety
Certificate No.: BAS01ATEX1303X
II 1G
Ex ia IIC T4 (Ta = -60 °C to 70 °C)
For use with Rosemount power module options 00753-9220-0001 only.
IP66/68
1180
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X)
The surface resistivity of the antenna is greater than one gigaohm. To avoid electrostatic charge
build-up, it must not be rubbed or cleaned with solvents or a dry cloth.
I7
IECEx Intrinsic Safety
Certificate No.: IECEx BAS 04.0017X
Ex ia IIC T4 (Ta = -60 °C to 70 °C)
For use with Rosemount power module options 00753-9220-0001 only.
IP66/68
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X)
The surface resistivity of the antenna is greater than one gigaohm. To avoid electrostatic charge
build-up, it must not be rubbed or cleaned with solvents or a dry cloth.
144
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
Appendix B: Product Certifications
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
B.1.9
Japanese Certifications
I4
B.1.10
June 2012
TIIS Intrinsic Safety
Ex ia IIC T4
Certificate
Description
TC18649
2051_CD/CG/LD/LG
TC18650
2051_CA/TA/TG/LA
TC18657
2051FA/SFC/SFP
China (NEPSI) Certifications
I3
China Intrinsic Safety
Certificate No. (manufactured in Chanhassen, MN): GYJ081078
Certificate No. (manufactured in Beijing, China): GYJ06367
Certificate No. (manufactured in Singapore): GYJ06365
Ex ia IIC T4
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X)
See appropriate certificate.
Product Certifications
145
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Reference Manual
June 2012
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
146
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
June 2012
Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale can be found at www.rosemount.com/terms_of_sale
The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co.
Rosemount. the Rosemount logotype, and SMART FAMILY are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc.
Coplanar is a trademark of Rosemount Inc.
Halocarbon is a trademark of the Halocarbon Products Corporation.o.
Fluorinert is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company Corporation
Syltherm 800 and D.C. 200 are registered trademarks of Dow Corning Corporation.
Neobee M-20 is a registered trademark of PVO International, Inc.
HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation.
Foundation fieldbus is a registered trademark of the Fieldbus Foundation.
All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
© June 2012 Rosemount, Inc. All rights reserved.
Emerson Process Management
Rosemount Measurement
8200 Market Boulevard
Chanhassen MN 55317 USA
Tel (USA) 1 800 999 9307
Tel (International) +1 952 906 8888
Fax +1 952 906 8889
Emerson Process Management
GmbH & Co.
Argelsrieder Feld 3
82234 Wessling
Germany
Tel 49 (8153) 9390
Fax 49 (8153) 939172
Emerson Process Management Asia
Pacific Private Limited
1 Pandan Crescent
Singapore 128461
T (65) 6777 8211
F (65) 6777 0947
Enquiries@AP.EmersonProcess.com
Beijing Rosemount Far East
Instrument Co., Limited
No. 6 North Street,
Hepingli, Dong Cheng District
Beijing 100013, China
T (86) (10) 6428 2233
F (86) (10) 6422 8586
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.7 Linearized : No Author : ALEXKEN Create Date : 2012:10:02 12:02:44-05:00 Modify Date : 2012:10:02 12:07:04-05:00 Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04 Metadata Date : 2012:10:02 12:07:04-05:00 Creator Tool : FrameMaker 8.0 Format : application/pdf Title : 2051_Wireless_revAA.book Creator : ALEXKEN Document ID : uuid:dcda478a-8e72-4e5c-a350-85f72bc3ee48 Instance ID : uuid:f6ba167b-3d96-43c8-a0f1-2ef8d55b96f1 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.3 (Windows) Page Count : 250EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools